autorem.fr® 5000/Manual...VLT® 5000 AQUA MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark...

VLT® 5000 AQUA

MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark

Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

AP

rog

ram

min

gA

ll ab

out

VLT

500

0 A

QU

AIn

stal

lati

on

Document Version 6.00

Technical Information on the new 75 HP version of the VLT 5000 AQUA

The VLT 5072 AQUA is superseding the VLT 5075 AQUA. Therefore please use the new version in new designs.

Technical dataThe technical data remains unchanged compared to the VLT 5075 AQUA.

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 106

IVLT,N max [A] (380-440 V) 117

IVLT,N [A] (441-460V) 106

IVLT,N max [A] (441V-460V) 117 Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 73,4

SVLT,N [kVA] (441-460 V) 84,5

Typical shaft output [kW] (380-460V) 55

Typical shaft output [HP] (380-460V) 75 Rated input current [A] 104

Max. pre-fuses [A] 150

Efficiency 0,96-0,97

Max. cable cross section (mm2/AWG) 50/0

Min. cable cross section (mm2/AWG) 16/6 Prefuse SMPS 4 A Weight IP20 [kg] 43

IP54 [kg] 60

Temperature (average at no de-rating) [ C] 40

Switch frequency [kHz] 4,5 kHz

Power loss at max load [W] 1851

Electrical connections are identical to those of VLT 5062 AQUA.

Enclosure size

Enclosure type Height [mm] Width [mm] Depth [mm] IP20/Nema1 800 308 296 IP54 940 400 28 Nema1 (no RFI filter) 800 308 296

The VLT 5075 AQUA in IP00 enclosure is succeeded by the VLT 5072 AQUA with IP20/Nema1 enclosure. Alldimensions and the design similar to VLT 5062 AQUA for 380-460 VAC. See dimensional drawings for this type.

EMC specificationsThe drives meet the same demands as VLT 5062 AQUA with built in RFI filter. For conducted emission this means(according to EN55011)

- 50 m screened cable Class B1- 150 m screened cable Class A1

300 m unscreened cable Class A1

VLT® 5000 AQUA

MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark

Acoustic noiseMeasurements have proven that the level is lower than that of the existing drives.

IP20/Nema1 units:67 dB(A)IP54 units: ........... 66 dB(A)

OptionsWe offer the same range of options as for the existing product range. This means a wide range of built in options aswell as separate options.

LC filters

LC filters for the existing VLT 5075 AQUA can be used as it is rated for the actual current. The order number is175U4701 for use with VLT 5072 AQUA.

VLT® 5000 AQUA

1MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark

Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

AP

rog

ram

min

gA

ll ab

out

VLT

500

0 A

QU

AIn

stal

lati

on

Contents

Document Version 6.00

IntroductionSafety regulations ....................................................................................................... 4

Warning against unintended start ............................................................................... 4

Introduction to Operating Instructions ......................................................................... 6

Control principle ......................................................................................................... 7

AEO - Automatic Energy Optimization ........................................................................ 7

Example of application - Constant pressure regulation in water supply system ........... 8

Serial communication ................................................................................................. 9

Unpacking and ordering a VLT Adjustable Frequency Drive (AFD) ............................. 10

Type code ordering number string ............................................................................ 10

Conformal Coating ................................................................................................... 10

Ordering form VLT 5000 AQUA ................................................................................ 11

InstallationGeneral technical data ............................................................................................. 12

Line supply 3 x 200 - 240 V .................................................................................... 15

Technical data, line supply 3 x 380 - 460 V .............................................................. 16

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 380 - 460 V .......................................................... 18

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 380 - 460 V .......................................................... 19

Mechanical dimensions ............................................................................................ 20

Mechanical installation ............................................................................................. 23

Spacing when installing of VLT 5006-5011 380-460 V

NEMA 1, Compact NEMA 1 and NEMA 12. ............................................................. 23

Enclosure protection ................................................................................................ 23

Field-mounting ......................................................................................................... 23

General information about electrical installation ........................................................ 26

High voltage warning ................................................................................................ 26

Grounding ................................................................................................................ 26

Cables ..................................................................................................................... 26

Shielded/armored cables ......................................................................................... 26

High voltage test ...................................................................................................... 27

Heat emission from VLT 5000 AQUA ........................................................................ 27

Grounding of shielded/armored control cables ......................................................... 28

VLT 5000 AQUA enclosures ..................................................................................... 29

Tightening-up torque and screw sizes ...................................................................... 35

Line connection ........................................................................................................ 35

Line-fuses ................................................................................................................ 38

Motor connection .................................................................................................... 38

DC bus connection ................................................................................................. 40

High-voltage relay .................................................................................................... 40

Electrical installation, control cables ........................................................................ 40

Switches 1-4 ........................................................................................................... 41

Connection example, VLT 5000 AQUA ................................................................... 43

VLT® 5000 AQUA

2 MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark

ProgrammingControl unit LCP ...................................................................................................... 45

Quick Menu ............................................................................................................ 50

Parameter Data....................................................................................................... 50

Example of Changing Parameter Data .................................................................... 50

The Setup configuration .......................................................................................... 51

Setup of user-defined readout ................................................................................. 52

Load and Motor 100-117 ........................................................................................ 57

Configuration ........................................................................................................... 57

References & Limits 200 - 228................................................................................ 64

Reference handling ................................................................................................. 65

Inputs and outputs 300-328 .................................................................................... 73

Analog inputs ........................................................................................................... 76

Analog/digital outputs .............................................................................................. 79

Relay outputs .......................................................................................................... 82

Application functions 400-427 ................................................................................. 84

Sleep mode ............................................................................................................. 85

PID for process control ............................................................................................ 89

PID overview ........................................................................................................... 91

Serial communication for FC protocol ..................................................................... 97

Protocols ................................................................................................................. 97

Telegram communication ........................................................................................ 97

Telegram build-up under FC protocol ...................................................................... 98

Data character (byte) .............................................................................................. 99

Process word ....................................................................................................... 103

Control word as per FC protocol ........................................................................... 103

Status word as per FC protocol ............................................................................ 105

Serial communication 500 - 556 ........................................................................... 108

Warning words 1+2 and Alarm word..................................................................... 116

Service functions 600-631 ..................................................................................... 118

Electrical installation of the relay card .................................................................... 123

All about VLT 5000 AQUAStatus messages................................................................................................... 124

List of warnings and alarms ................................................................................... 126

Aggressive environments ....................................................................................... 132

Calculation of resulting reference .......................................................................... 132

Extreme running conditions ................................................................................... 134

Peak voltage on motor .......................................................................................... 135

Derating for ambient temperature ......................................................................... 136

Efficiency ............................................................................................................... 138

Definitions .............................................................................................................. 140

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

A

This Operating Instruction can be used for all VLT 5000 AQUA,Adjustable Frequency Drives (AFD) with software version 2.0x.The software version number can be seen from parameter624 Software version no.

VLT 5000 AQUA

Operating InstructionsSoftware version: 2.0x

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Warning:Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after theequipment has been disconnected from line.

Using VLT: wait at least 15 minutes

The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever the equipment isconnected to line. Incorrect instal-

lation of the motor or the AFD maycause damage to the equipment, serious personalinjury or death.Consequently, the instructions in this manual, aswell as national and local rules and safetyregulations, must be complied with.

Safety regulations1. The VLT AFD must be disconnected from the line if

repair work is to be carried out.Check that the line supply has been disconnected andthat the necessary time has passed before removingmotor and line plugs.

2. The [OFF/STOP] key on the control panel of the VLTAFD does not disconnect the equipment from line andis thus not to be used as a safety switch.

3. Correct protective grounding of the equipment must beestablished, the user must be protected against supplyvoltage, and the motor must be protected againstoverload in accordance with the National ElectricalCode and local codes.

4. The ground leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA.5. Protection against motor overload is not included in the

factory setting. If this function is required, set parame-ter 117, Motor thermal protection, to data value ETRtrip or data value ETR warning.Note: The function is initialised at 1.0 x rated motorcurrent and rated motor frequency (see parameter 117,Motor thermal protection).In UL/cUL applications ETR provides Class 20, over-load protection in accordance with the NEC®.

6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and linesupply while the VLT AFD is connected to line.Check that the line supply has beendisconnected and that the necessary time haspassed before removing motor and line plugs.

7. Reliable galvanic isolation (PELV) is not compliedwith if the RFI switch is placed in OFF position.This means that all control in- and outputs canonly be considered low-voltage terminals withbasic galvanic isolation.

8. Please note that the VLT AFD has more voltageinputs than L1, L2, L3 when the DC-bus terminalsor AUX 24 V option are used.Check that all voltage inputs have beendisconnected and that the necessary time haspassed before repair work is commenced.

Warning against unintended start1. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of

digital commands, bus commands, references ora local stop, while the AFD is connected to line.If personal safety considerations make itnecessary to ensure that no unintended startoccurs, these stop functions are not sufficient.

2. While parameters are being changed, the motormay start. Consequently, the stop key [OFF/STOP] must always be activated, following whichdata can be modified.

3. A stopped motor may start if a fault occurs in theelectronics of the VLT AFD , or if a temporaryoverload or a fault in the supply line or the motorconnection ceases.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

A

It is the responsibility of theuser or the person installingthe VLT to provide propergrounding, as well as motoroverload and branch circuitprotection according to theNational Electrical Code(NEC® ) and local codes.

Electrostatic Precaution;Electrostatic discharge (ESD). Manyelectronic components are sensitiveto static electricity. Voltages so lowthat they cannot be felt, seen orheard, can reduce the life, affectperformance, or completely destroysensitive electronic components.

When performing service, properESD equipment should be used toprevent possible damage fromoccurring.

The VLT Adjustable FrequencyDrive contains dangerousvoltages when connected toline voltage. After disconnectingfrom the line wait at least 15minutes before touching anyelectrical components. Alsomake sure that other voltageinputs have been disconnected,such as external 24 VDC, load-sharing (linkage of DCintermediate circuit), as well asthe motor connection for kineticback-up. Only a competentelectrician should carry out theelectrical installation. Improperinstallation of the motor or theVLT may cause equipmentfailure, serious injury or death.Follow this manual and NationalElectrical Codes (NEC ) andlocal safety codes.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Introduction to Operating Instructions

These Operating Instructions are divided into four sections with information about VLT 5000 AQUA.

IntrIntrIntrIntrIntroduction to AQUA:oduction to AQUA:oduction to AQUA:oduction to AQUA:oduction to AQUA: This section tells you the advantages you can obtain by using a VLT 5000AQUA - such as AEO, Automatic Energy Optimization, and other AQUA-relevant functions.This section also contains examples of applications as well as informationabout Danfoss.

Installation:Installation:Installation:Installation:Installation: This section tells you how to carry out a mechanically correct installation of theVLT 5000 AQUA.Furthermore, a list is given of line and motor connections, together with adescription of the control card terminals.

PrPrPrPrProgramming:ogramming:ogramming:ogramming:ogramming: This section describes the control unit and the software parameters for the VLT5000 AQUA. Also included is a guide to the Quick Setup menu, which allowsyou to get started on your application very quickly.

All about VLAll about VLAll about VLAll about VLAll about VLT 5000 AQUA:T 5000 AQUA:T 5000 AQUA:T 5000 AQUA:T 5000 AQUA: This section gives information about status, warning and error messages fromthe VLT 5000 AQUA. Additionally, information is given on technical data, ser-vice, factory settings and special conditions.

Indicates a general warning. Indicates a high-voltage warning.Indicates something to be notedby the reader.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

A

5. Intermediate circuit capacitorsEven out the intermediate circuit voltage.

6. InverterConverts DC voltage into variable AC voltage witha variable frequency.

7. Motor voltageVariable AC voltage, 10-100% of line supplyvoltage.

8. Control card

AEO - Automatic Energy OptimizationNormally, the U/f characteristics have to be set on thebasis of the expected load at different frequencies.However, knowing the load at a given frequency in aninstallation is often a problem. This problem can be sol-ved by using a VLT 5000 AQUA with its integralAutomatic Energy Optimization (AEO), which ensuresoptimum energy utilization. All VLT 5000 AQUA unitsfeature this function as a factory setting, i.e. it is notnecessary to adjust the AFD U/f ratio in order to obtainmaximum energy savings. In other AFDs, the given loadand voltage/frequency ratio (U/f) must be assessed tocarry out correct setting of the AFD.Using Automatic Energy Optimization (AEO), you nolonger need to calculate or assess the systemcharacteristics of the installation, since Danfoss VLT5000 AQUA units guarantee optimum, load-dependent energy consumption by the motor at all ti-mes.

The figure on the right illustrates the working range ofthe AEO function, within which energy optimization isenabled.

If the AEO function has been selected in parameter 101,Torque characteristics, this function will be constantly active.If there is a major deviation from the optimum U/f ratio, theVLT AFD will quickly adjust itself.

Advantages of the AEO function• Automatic energy optimization• Compensation if an oversize motor is used• AEO matches operations to daily or seasonal

fluctuations• Energy savings in a constant volume system• Compensation in the oversynchronous working range• Reduces acoustic motor noise

1. Line voltage3 x 200 - 240 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz3 x 380 - 460 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz.

2. RectifierA three-phase rectifier bridge that rectifies ACcurrent into DC current.

3. Intermediate circuitDC voltage = √2 x line voltage [V].

4. Intermediate circuit coilsEven out the intermediate circuit voltage andreduce the harmonic current feedback to the linesupply.

Control principleAn AFD rectifies AC voltage from line into DC voltage,after which this DC voltage is converted into an ACcurrent with a variable amplitude and frequency.

The motor is thus supplied with variable voltage andfrequency, which enables infinitely variable speedregulation of three-phased, standard AC motors.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Example of application - Constant pressure regulation in water supply system

Set the following parameters:

Par. 100 Configuration Closed loop [1]

Par. 302 Terminal 18 Digital inputs Start [1]

Par. 314 Terminal 60, analog input current Feedback signal [2]

Par. 315 Terminal 60, min. scaling 4 mA

Par. 316 Terminal 60, max. scaling 20 mA

Par. 403 Sleep mode timer 10 sec.

Par. 404 Sleep frequency 15 Hz

Par. 405 Wake-up frequency 20 Hz

Par. 406 Boost setpoint 125%

Par. 415 Process units Bar [16]

Par. 418 Setpoint 1 5 bar

The demand for water from waterworks variesconsiderably over the 24 hours of a day. In thenight, practically no water is used, while in themorning and in the evening the consumption ishigh. In order to maintain a suitable pressure inthe water supply lines in relation to the currentdemand, the water supply pumps are equippedwith speed control. The use of AFD’s enablesthe energy consumed by the pumps to be keptat a minimum, while optimizing the watersupply to consumers.

A VLT 5000 AQUA with its integral PID controllerensures simple and quick installation. For example,a NEMA 12 unit can be mounted close to thepump on the wall and the existing line cables canbe used as line supply to the AFD.A Danfoss MBS 33 0-10 bar can be fitted a fewfeet from the joint outlet point from thewaterworks to obtain closed loop regulation.Danfoss MBS 33 is a two-wire transmitter (4-20mA) that can be powered directly from a VLT5000 AQUA.The required setpoint (e.g. 5 bar) can be setlocally in parameter 418 Setpoint 1.

VLT 5000 AQUA

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

A

500-537 Serial communication

NOTE:Information on the use of RS 485 serial interfaceis not included in this manual. Please contact

Danfoss and ask for information concerning serialcommunication.

Serial communicationSerial communication allows monitoring, programmingand controlling one or several units from a centrallyplaced computer.All VLT 5000 AQUA units have a RS 485 port asstandard with a choice of two protocols. The twoprotocols selectable in parameter 500 Telegramprofilare:• FC protocol• Johnson Controls Metasys N2

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Unpacking and ordering a VLT AdjustableFrequency Drive (AFD)If you are in doubt as to which VLT AFD you havereceived and which options it contains? Use the followingtable to find out. The table can also be used for orderinga VLT 5000 AQUA.

Type code ordering number stringOn the basis of your order, the VLT AFD is given anordering number that can be seen from the nameplateon the unit. The number may look as follows:

VLVLVLVLVLTTTTT-5008-A-T4-B20ST-5008-A-T4-B20ST-5008-A-T4-B20ST-5008-A-T4-B20ST-5008-A-T4-B20ST-R0-DL-F00-A31-R0-DL-F00-A31-R0-DL-F00-A31-R0-DL-F00-A31-R0-DL-F00-A31

This means that the AFD ordered is a VLT 5008 for three-phase line voltage of 380-460 V (T4T4T4T4T4) in Compactenclosure NEMA 1 (B20STB20STB20STB20STB20ST). The hardware variant iswith out integral RFI filter, (R0). The AFD features a dis-play unit (DLDLDLDLDL) with no field bus option card (F00F00F00F00F00), and the4 relay Card Option (A31)(A31)(A31)(A31)(A31). Character no. 8 (AAAAA) indicatesthe application range of the unit: AAAAA = AQUA.

Line voltage, rated:Motor power 200-240 V 380-460 V5.0 HP VLT 5006 VLT 50067.5 HP VLT 5008 VLT 500810 HP VLT 5011 VLT 501115 HP VLT 5016 VLT 501620 HP VLT 5022 VLT 502225 HP VLT 5027 VLT 502730 HP VLT 5032 VLT 503240 HP VLT 5042 VLT 504250 HP VLT 5052 VLT 505260 HP VLT 5062 VLT 5062

Units in the range of 5.0 -60 HP come with enclosureNEMA 1, NEMA 12, and protected chassis (IP20), 40-60 HP 230V available in chassis (IP00).

Line voltage, rated:Motor power 400 V 1) 460 V 1)

75 HP VLT 5075 -100 HP VLT 5100 VLT 5075125 HP VLT 5125 VLT 5100150 HP VLT 5150 VLT 5125200 HP VLT 5200 VLT 5150250 HP VLT 5250 VLT 5200300 HP VLT 5300 VLT 5250300 HP VLT 5350 VLT 5300350 HP VLT 5450 VLT 5350450 HP VLT 5500 VLT 5450500 HP VLT 5600 VLT 5500600 HP - VLT 5600

Units in the range of 75-600 HP come with enclosureChassis, NEMA 1 or NEMA 12.1) The max. output depends on the line voltage

connected to the unit.

Conformal CoatingAll types of units in the program are available with orwithout conformal coating of the PCB.

Hardware variantsAll units in the program are available in the followinghardware variants:ST: Standard unit w/ or w/o control unit.EX: Extended unit for VLT type 5350 - 5600 with

control unit, connection of external 24 V DCsupply for back-up of control PCB, connection toDC intermediate circuit for load-sharing, as wellas quick discharging of DC intermediate circuit.

DX: Extended unit for VLT type 5350 - 5600 withcontrol unit, built-in mains fuses and discon-nector, connection of external 24 V DC supplyfor back-up of control PCB, connection to DCintermediate circuit for load-sharing, as well asquick discharging of DC intermediate circuit.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Intr

od

ucti

on

toA

QU

A

No filtration:VLT 5006-5011, 380-460Vcome with integral RFI filter.

Ordering form VLT 5000 AQUA

Power sizese.g. 5008

Line voltage3 x 200-240V T 23 x 380-460V T 4

Hardware variantstandard only S TExtended with loadsharing and EXexternal 24 V DC.Only available for VLT 5350-5600380-460 VExtended with loadsharing, D Xexternal 24 V DC and built-in mainsfuses and disconnector.Only available for VLT 5300-5500380-500 V

Ordered by:

Date:

Please take a copy of the ordering forms. Fill themin and send or fax your order to the nearestDanfoss rep. office.

RFI filters R 0

Display unit (LCP)W/ LCP only D L

5006 5 HP5008 7.5 HP5011 10 HP5016 15 HP5022 20 HP5027 25 HP5032 30 HP5042 40 HP5052 50 HP5062 60 HP

5006 5 HP5008 7.5 HP5011 10 HP5016 15 HP5022 20 HP5027 25 HP5032 30 HP5042 40 HP5052 50 HP5062 60 HP5075 75 HP5100 100 HP5125 125 HP5150 150 HP5200 200 HP5250 250 HP5300 300 HP5350 350 HP5450 450 HP5500 500 HP5600 600 HP

5 A T R 0 D L F 0 0 A

Additinal Fieldbus option cardsNo additional option cards F 0 0(Metasys, N2 is factory standard)

Application option cardNo Application option card.

A30-Aux Relay Option Card (1 relay).

A31 Relaycard for additional 4 form C 250V, 2A relays

No. units ofthis type

VLT

Requireddelivery date

ApplicationrangeAQUA A

Chassis C 0 05042-5062 200-240 V5075-5300 380-460 V

NEMA 1 CN 15006-5062 200-240 V5006-5300 380-460 V

NEMA 12 C 5 45006-5062 200-240 V5006-5600 380-460 V

C

A 0 0

A 3 0

A 3 1

Conformal coatingWithout coatingWith coating C1

C0

C

VLT® 5000 AQUA


General technical data

Line supply (L1, L2, L3):Supply voltage 200-240 V units .......................................................................3 x 200/208/220/230/240 V ±10%Supply voltage 380-460 V units ........................................................................ 3 x 380/400/415/440/460 V ±10%Supply frequency .......................................................................................................................... 50/60 Hz +/- 1%Max. imbalance of supply voltage:VLT 5006 - 5011 AQUA / 380 - 460 V .................................................................... ±2.0% of rated supply voltageVLT 5016 - 5062 AQUA / 380 - 460 V and VLT 5006 - 5032 AQUA / 200 - 240 V .. ±1.5% of rated supply voltageVLT 5075 - 5600 AQUA / 380 - 460 V and VLT 5042 - 5062 AQUA / 200 - 240 V .. ±3.0% of rated supply voltagePower factor / cos. ϕ ........................................................................................................................0.90/1.0 at rated loadNo. of switches on supply input L1, L2, L3 ............................................................................... approx. 1 time/min.Max. short-circuit current ........................................................................................................................ 100.000 A

VLT output data (U, V, W):Output voltage ................................................................................................................ 0-100% of supply voltageOutput frequency............................................................................................................... 0 - 120 Hz, 0 - 1000 HzRated motor voltage, 200-240 V units .............................................................................. 200/208/220/230/240 VRated motor voltage, 380-460 V units .............................................................................. 380/400/415/440/460 VRated motor frequency ............................................................................................................................. 50/60 HzSwitching on output ................................................................................................................................ UnlimitedRamp times ........................................................................................................................................ 1- 3600 sec.

Torque characteristics:Starting torque .............................................................................................................................. 110% for 1 min.Starting torque (parameter 110 High break-away torque) ................................... Max. torque: 160% for 0.5 sec.Acceleration torque ....................................................................................................................................... 100%Overload torque ............................................................................................................................................ 110%

Control card, digital inputs:Number of programmable digital inputs ............................................................................................................... 8Terminal nos. .......................................................................................................... 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33Voltage level ......................................................................................................... 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)Voltage level, logical ´0´ ............................................................................................................................ < 5 V DCVoltage level, logical ´1´ .......................................................................................................................... > 10 V DCMaximum voltage on input ....................................................................................................................... 28 V DCInput resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................... approx. 2 kΩScanning time per input ............................................................................................................................ 3 msec.Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV). In addition, thedigital inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control card by connecting an external 24 V DCsupply and opening switch 4. See switches 1-4.

Control card, analog inputs:No. of programmable analogue voltage inputs/thermistor inputs .......................................................................... 2Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 53, 54Voltage level .......................................................................................................................... 0 - 10 V DC (scalable)Input resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................... approx. 10 kΩNo. of programmable analog current inputs ......................................................................................................... 1Terminal no. ground ............................................................................................................................................ 55Current range ....................................................................................................................... 0/4 - 20 mA (scalable)Input resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................... approx. 200 ΩResolution ........................................................................................................................................... 10 bit + signAccuracy on input .......................................................................................................... Max. error 1% of full scaleScanning time per input .............................................................................................................................. 3 msec.Reliable galvanic isolation: All analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n


Control card, pulse input:No. of programmable pulse inputs ...................................................................................................................... 3Terminal nos. .........................................................................................................................................17, 29, 33Max. frequency on terminal 17 ..................................................................................................................... 5 kHzMax. frequency on terminals 29, 33 ......................................................................... 20 kHz (PNP open collector)Max. frequency on terminals 29, 33 ..........................................................................................65 kHz (Push-pull)Voltage level ......................................................................................................... 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)Voltage level, logic ‘0’ ............................................................................................................................. < 5 V DCVoltage level, logic ‘1’ ........................................................................................................................... > 10 V DCMaximum voltage on input ....................................................................................................................... 28 V DCInput resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................... approx. 2 kΩScanning time per input ............................................................................................................................ 3 msec.Resolution ........................................................................................................................................... 10 bit + signAccuracy (100-1 kHz), terminals 17, 29, 33 .......................................................... Max. error: 0.5% of full scaleAccuracy (1-5 kHz), terminal 17 .............................................................................. Max. error: 0.1% of full scaleAccuracy (1-65 kHz), terminals 29, 33 .................................................................... Max. error: 0.1% of full scaleReliable galvanic isolation: All pulse inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV). In addition, pulseinputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control card by connecting an external 24 V DC supply andopening switch 4. See switches 1-4.

Control card, digital/pulse and analog outputs:No. of programmable digital and analog outputs ................................................................................................. 2Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 42, 45Voltage level at digital/pulse output ....................................................................................................... 0 - 24 V DCMinimum load to frame (terminal 39) at digital/pulse output ........................................................................... 600 ΩFrequency ranges (digital output used as pulse output) ............................................................................ 0-32 kHzCurrent range at analog output .............................................................................................................0/4 - 20 mAMaximum load to frame (terminal 39) at analog output .................................................................................. 500 ΩAccuracy of analog output .......................................................................................... Max. error: 1.5% of full scaleResolution on analog output. ............................................................................................................................ 8 bitReliable galvanic isolation: All digital and analog outputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) andother high-voltage terminals.

Control card, 24 V DC supply:Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 12, 13Max. load ................................................................................................................................................... 200 mATerminal nos. ground .................................................................................................................................... 20, 39Reliable galvanic isolation: The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has thesame potential as the analog outputs.

Control card, RS 485 serial communication:Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................. 68 (TX+, RX+), 69 (TX-, RX-)Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation (PELV).

Relay outputs:No. of programmable relay outputs ...................................................................................................................... 2Terminal nos., control card ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 (make)Max. terminal load on 4-5, control card .................................................. 50 V AC, 1 A, 60 VA, 75 V DC, 1 A, 30 WMax. terminal load on 4-5, control card for UL/cUL applications .............................. 30 V AC, 1 A / 42.5 V DC, 1ATerminal nos., power card and relay card ............................................................................ 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)Max. terminal load on 1-3, 1-2, power card and relay card ................................................... 240 V AC, 2 A, 60 VAMax. terminal load on 1-3, 1-2, power card........................................................................................ 50 V DC, 2 A

VLT® 5000 AQUA



External 24 Volt DC supply:Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 35, 36Voltage range ....................................................................................... 24 V DC ±15% (max. 37 V DC for 10 sec.)Max. voltage ripple ...................................................................................................................................... 2 V DCPower consumption ............................................................................ 15 W - 50 W (50 W for start-up, 20 msec.)Min. pre-fuse ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Amp

Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation if the external 24 V DC supply is also of the PELV type.

Cable lengths and cross-sections:Max. motor cable length, shielded cable .................................................................................................... 500 feetMax. motor cable length, unshielded cable ..............................................................................................1000 feetMax. motor cable length, shielded cable VLT 5011 380-460 V ................................................................... 330 feetMax. DC-bus cable length, shielded cable ..................................................................... 25 m from AFD to DC bar.Max. cable cross-section to motor, see next sectionMax. cross-section for control cables .......................................................................................... 1.5 mm2/16 AWGMax. cross-section for serial communication ............................................................................... 1.5 mm2/16 AWG

Control characteristics:Frequency range ................................................................................................................................... 0 - 1000 HzResolution on output frequency .............................................................................................................. ±0.003 HzSystem response time ................................................................................................................................ 3 msec.Speed, control range (open loop) ...................................................................................... 1:100 of synchro. speedSpeed, control range (closed loop) ................................................................................. 1:1000 of synchro. speedSpeed, accuracy (open loop) ............................................................................ < 1500 rpm: max. error ± 7.5 rpm

> 1500 rpm: max. error of 0.5% of actual speedProcess, accuracy (closed loop) ........................................................................ < 1500 rpm: max. error ± 1.5 rpm

> 1500 rpm: max. error of 0.1% of actual speedAll control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor

Accuracy of Display readout (parameters 009-012 Display readout):Motor current [5], 0 - 140% load ............................................................ Max. error: ±2.0% of rated output currentPower kW [6], Power HP [7], 0 - 90% load .............................................. Max. error: ±5.0% of rated output power

Externals:Enclosure .................................................................................................................... Chassis, NEMA 1, NEMA 12Vibration test .................................. 0.7 g RMS 18-1000 Hz random. 3 directions for 2 hours (IEC 68-2-34/35/36)Max. relative humidity ............................................................. 93 % +2 %, -3 % (IEC 68-2-3) for storage/transportMax. relative humidity ................................................ 95% non condensing (IEC 721-3-3; class 3K3) for operationAmbient temperature Chassis/NEMA 1/NEMA 12 ................................... Max. 45°C (24-hour average max. 40°C)Ambient temperature NEMA 1/NEMA 12 VLT 5011 460 V....................... Max. 40°C (24-hour average max. 35°C)see Derating for high ambient temperatureMin. ambient temperature in full operation ........................................................................................................ 0°CMin. ambient temperature at reduced performance ....................................................................................... -10°CTemperature during storage/transport ............................................................................................ -25 - +65/70°CMax. altitude above sea level ....................................................................................................................3300 feetsee Derating for high air pressure

VLT 5000 AQUA protection:••••• Electronic motor thermal protection against overload.••••• Temperature monitoring of heat-sink ensures that the VLT AFD cuts out if the temperature reaches 90°C for

Chassis and NEMA 1. For NEMA 12, the cut-out temperature is 80°C. An overtemperature can only be resetwhen the temperature of the heat-sink has fallen below 60°C.

••••• The VLT AFD is protected against short-circuiting on motor terminals U, V, W.••••• The VLT AFD is protected against ground fault on motor terminals U, V, W.••••• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the VLT AFD cuts out if the intermediate circuit volt-

age gets too high or too low.••••• If a motor phase is missing, the VLT AFD cuts out.••••• If there is a line fault, the VLT AFD is able to carry out a controlled deramping.••••• If a line phase is missing, the VLT AFD will cut out when a load is placed on the motor.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type 50165016501650165016 50225022502250225022 50275027502750275027 50325032503250325032 50425042504250425042 50525052505250525052 50625062506250625062

Output current IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 115 143 170IVLT, MAX

(60 s) [A] (200-230 V) 50.6 65.3 82.3 96.8 127 158 187IVLT,N [A] (240 V) 46.0 59.4 74.8 88.0 104 130 154

IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (240 V) 50.6 65.3 82.3 96.8 115 143 170

Output SVLT,N [kVA] (240 V) 19.1 24.7 31.1 36.6 41.0 52.0 61.0

Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60Max. cable cross-section to motor and

DC-bus [mm2/AWG] 2) copper 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0 70/1/0 95/3/0 120/4/0

aluminium 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0 95/3/05) 90/250mcm5)120/300mcm5)

Min. cable cross-section to motor andDC-bus [mm2/AWG] 2 ) 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6 10/8 10/8 10/8

Max. input current (200 V) (RMS) IL,N [A] 46.0 59.2 74.8 88.0 101.3 126.6 149.9Max. cable, cross-section,power [mm2/AWG]2) copper 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0 70/1/0 95/3/0 120/4/0

aluminium 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0 95/3/05) 90/250mcm5) 120/300mcm5)

Max. line-fuses [A]/UL 3) [A] 60 80 125 125 150 200 250Efficiency 4) 0.95Weight Chassis [lbs] - - - - 180 180 180

Weight NEMA 1 [lbs] 46 60 60 96 202 202 202

Weight NEMA 12 [lbs] 76 98 100 110 208 208 208

Power loss at max. load: [W] 545 783 1042 1243 1089 1361 1613

Enclosure NEMA 1, NEMA 12

VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type 50065006500650065006 50085008500850085008 50115011501150115011

Output current 1) IVLT,N [A] 16.7 24.2 30.8IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] 18.4 26.6 33.9

Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 6.9 10.1 12.8Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 4.0 5.5 7.5Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 5 7.5 10Max. cable cross-sectionto motor and DC-bus [mm2/AWG]2 ) 4/10 16/6 16/6

Max. input current (200 V) (RMS) IL,N [A] 16.0 23.0 30.0

Max. cable cross-sectionpower [mm2]/[AWG] 2) 4/10 16/6 16/6Max. line-fuses [A]/UL 3) [A] 50 50 50Line contactor [Danfoss type] CI 6 CI 9 CI 16

[AC value] AC-1 AC-1 AC-1Efficiency 4) 0.96Weight NEMA 1 [lbs] 51 51 51

Weight NEMA 12 [lbs] 77 77 84

Power loss at max. load. [W] Total 194 426 545Enclosure VLT type NEMA 1/NEMA 12

Line supply 3 x 200 - 240 VAccording to international requirements

1. Current ratings fulfill UL requirements for 208-240 V

2. American Wire Gauge.

3. See Line Connection section in this manual for VLT fuse types.

4. Measured using 100 ft. shielded motor cable at rated load and rated frequency.

5. Connection stud 1 x M8 / 2 x M8.


VLT® 5000 AQUA



Technical data, line supply 3 x 380 - 460 VAccording to international requirements VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type 50065006500650065006 50085008500850085008 50115011501150115011

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-415 V) 10.0 13.0 16.0IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-415 V) 11.0 14.3 17.6

IVLT,N [A] (416-460 V) 8.2 11.0 14.0IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (416-460 V) 9.0 12.1 15.4

Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 7.2 9.3 11.5SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 6.5 8.8 11.2

Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 4.0 5.5 7.5Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 5 7.5 10Max. cable cross-sectionto motor and DC-bus [mm2/AWG]1) 4/10 4/10 4/10

Max. input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 9.1 12.2 15.0

(RMS) IL,N [A] (460 V) 8.3 10.6 14.0

Max. cable cross-section,power [mm2]/[AWG]1) 4/10 4/10 4/10Max. line-fuses [A]/UL2) [A] 25/20 25/25 35/30Efficiency 3) 0.96Weight NEMA 1 [lbs] 21 21 21Weight NEMA 12 [lbs] 28 28 28Power loss at max. load. [W] Total 198 250 295

Enclosure VLT type Compact NEMA 1/NEMA 12


Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-415 V) 24.0 32.0 37.5 44.0 61.0 73.0 90.0IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-415 V) 26.4 35.2 41.3 48.4 67.1 80.3 99.0

IVLT,N [A] (416-460 V) 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (416-460 V) 23.1 29.7 37.4 44.0 57.2 71.5 84.7

Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 17.3 23.0 27.0 31.6 43.8 52.5 64.7SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 16.7 21.5 27.1 31.9 41.4 51.8 61.3

Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60Max. cable cross-sectionto motor and DC-bus [mm2/AWG]1) 16/6 16/6 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0Min. cable cross-sectionto motor and DC-bus4) [mm2/AWG]1) 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6

Max. input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 24.0 32.0 37.5 44.0 60.0 72.0 89.0

(RMS) IL,N [A] (460 V) 21.0 27.6 34.0 41.0 53.0 64.0 77.0

Max. cable cross-section,power [mm2]/[AWG]1) 16/6 16/6 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0Max. line-fuses [A]/UL2) [A] 63/40 63/40 63/50 63/60 80/80 100/100 125/125Efficiency at rated frequency 0.96Weight NEMA 1 [lbs] 21 46 46 60 60 96 96Weight NEMA 12 [lbs] 28 96 96 102 122 134 140Power loss at max. load. [W] 419 559 655 768 1065 1275 1571Enclosure NEMA 1/NEMA 12

1. American Wire Gauge.

2. See Line Connection section in this manual for VLT fuse types.

3. Measured using 100 feet shielded motor cable at rated load and rated frequency.4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.

Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n


Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-415 V) 106 147 177 212 260 315 368IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-415 V) 117 162 195 233 286 347 405

IVLT,N [A] (416-460 V) 106 130 160 190 240 302 361IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (416-460 V) 117 143 176 209 264 332 397

Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 73 102 123 147 180 218 255SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 84,5 104 127 151 191 241 288

Typical shaft output (380-415 V) PVLT,N [kW] 55 75 90 110 132 160 200Typical shaft output (440-460 V)PVLT, N [HP] 75 100 125 150 200 250 300Max. cross-section of copper cableto motor and DC-bus (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 70 95 120 2x70 2x70 2x95 2x120Max. cross-section of copper cableto motor and DC-bus (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 70 70 95 2x70 2x70 2x95 2x120Max. cross-section of aluminium cableto motor and DC-bus (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 95 90 120 2x70 2x95 2x120 2x150Max. cross-section of aluminium cableto motor and DC-bus (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 70 120 150 2x70 2x120 2x120 2x150Max. cross-section of copper cableto motor and DC-bus (380-415 V)[AWG2)]1) 1/0 3/0 4/0 2x1/0 2x2/0 2x3/0 2x250mcmMax. cross-section of copper cableto motor and DC-bus (440-460 V)[AWG2)]1) 1/0 2/0 3/0 2x1/0 2x1/0 2x3/0 2x4/0Max. cross-section of aluminium cableto motor and DC-bus (380-415 V)[AWG2)]1) 3/0 250mcm 300mcm 2x2/0 2x4/0 2x250mcm 2x350mcmMax. cross-section of aluminium cableto motor and DC-bus (440-460 V)[AWG2)]1) 3/0 4/0 250mcm 2x2/0 2x3/0 2x250mcm 2x300mcmMax. cross-section of cable to motor,and DC-bus3) [mm2/AWG2)]1) 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6 16/6

Technical data, line supply 3 x 380 - 460 VAccording to international requirements

Max. input current4) IL,N [A] (400 V) 103 145 174 206 256 317 366(RMS) IL,N [A] (460 V) 103 128 158 185 236 304 356Max. cross-section of copper cableto power (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 70 95 120 2x70 2x70 2x95 2x120Max. cross-section of copper cableto power (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 70 70 95 2x70 2x70 2x95 2x120Max. cross-section of aluminium cableto power (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 95 90 120 2x70 2x95 2x120 2x150Max. cross-section of aluminium cableto power (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 70 120 150 2x70 2x120 2x120 2x150Max. cross-section of copper cableto power (380-415 V) [AWG2)]1) 1/0 3/0 4/0 2x1/0 2x2/0 2x3/0 2x250mcmMax. cross-section of copper cableto power (440-460 V) [AWG2)]1) 1/0 2/0 3/0 2x1/0 2x1/0 2x3/0 2x4/0Max. cross-section of aluminium cableto power (380-415V) [AWG2)]1) 3/0 250mcm 300mcm 2x2/0 2x4/0 2x250mcm 2x350mcmMax. cross-section of aluminium cableto power (440-460 V) [AWG2)]1) 3/0 4/0 250mcm 2x2/0 2x3/0 2x250mcm 2x300mcmMin. cable cross-section to motor,and DC-bus 3) [mm2/AWG2)] 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6Max. line-fuses [A]/UL5) [A] 150/150 250/200 250/250 300/300 350/350 450/400 500/500Internal drive fuses [A]/UL5) [A] 15/15 15/15 15/15 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30Power/Interface Board Fuse [A]/UL5) [A] 5.0/5.0Weight Chassis [lbs] 218 218 218 292 292 292 292Weight NEMA 1 [lbs] 242 242 242 322 322 322 322Weight NEMA 12 [lbs] 248 248 248 354 354 354 354Efficiency at rated frequency 0.96-0.97Power loss at max. load [W] 1430 1970 2380 2860 3810 4770 5720

Enclosure Chassis / NEMA 1 / NEMA 12


2. American Wire Gauge.3. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.

Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.4. Drive automatically compensates for power fluctuations +/- 10% of the input voltage.5. See Line Connection section in this manual for VLT fuse types.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Technical data, line supply 3 x 380 - 460 VAccording to international requirements VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type 53505350535053505350 54505450545054505450 55005500550055005500 56005600560056005600

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-415 V) 480 600 658 745IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-415 V) 528 660 724 820

IVLT,N [A] (440-460 V) 443 540 590 678IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (440-460 V) 487 594 649 746

Output SVLT,N [kVA] (415 V) 345 431 473 536SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 353 430 470 540

Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 250 315 355 400Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT, N [HP] 350 450 500 600Max. cross-section ofcopper cable to motor 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300and loadsharing (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150Max. cross-section ofcopper cable to motor 2 x 120 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 300and loadsharing (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 95 3 x 120Max. cross-section ofaluminium cable to motor 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300and loadsharing (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185 3 x 185Max. cross-section ofaluminium cable to motor 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240and loadsharing (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185Max. cross-section ofcopper cable to motor 2 x 250mcm 2 x 350mcm 2 x 400mcm 2 x 500mcmand loadsharing (380-415 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 x 2/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0 3 x 250mcmMax. cross-section ofcopper cable to motor 2 x 4/0 2 x 300mcm 2 x 350mcm 2 x 500mcmand loadsharing (440-460 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 1/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0Max. cross-section ofaluminium cable to motor 2 x 350mcm 2 x 500mcm 2 x 600mcm 2 x 700mcmand loadsharing (380-415 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 x 4/0 3 x 250mcm 3 x 300mcm 3 x 350mcmMax. cross-section ofaluminium cable to motor 2 x 300mcm 2 x 400mcm 2 x 500mcm 2 x 600mcmand loadsharing (440-460 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0 3 x 250mcm 3 x 300mcm

1. Connection stud 1 x M8 / 2 x M8.2. American Wire Gauge.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Max. input current IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 389 467 584 648(RMS) IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 356 431 526 581Max. cross-section ofcopper cable 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300to power (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150Max. cross-section ofcopper cable 2 x 120 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 300to power (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 95 3 x 120Max. cross-section ofaluminium cable 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300to power (380-415 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185 3 x 185Max. cross-section ofaluminium cable 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240to power (440-460 V) [mm2]1) 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185Max. cross-section ofcopper cable 2 x 250mcm 2 x 350mcm 2 x 400mcm 2 x 500mcmto power (380-415 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 x 2/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0 3 x 250mcmMax. cross-section ofcopper cable 2 x 4/0 2 x 300mcm 2 x 350mcm 2 x 500mcmto power (440-460 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 1/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0Max. cross-section ofaluminium cable 2 x 350mcm 2 x 500mcm 2 x 600mcm 2 x 700mcmto power (380-415 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 x 4/0 3 x 250mcm 3 x 300mcm 3 x 350mcmMax. cross-section ofaluminium cable 2 x 300mcm 2 x 400mcm 2 x 500mcm 2 x 600mcmto power (440-460 V) [AWG]2) 1) 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0 3 x 250mcm 3 x 300mcmMax. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL3) [A] 630/600 700/700 800/800 800/800Internal drive fuses [-]/UL3) [A] 15/15 15/15 15/15 30/30Internal drive fuses(resistor) [-]/UL3) [A] 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL3) [A] 5.0/5.0Efficiency 0.97Weight IP 00 [kg] 480 515 560 585Weight NEMA 1 [kg] 595 630 675 700Weight NEMA 12 [kg] 605 640 685 710Power loss at max. load [W] 7500 9450 10650 12000

Enclosure Chassis, NEMA 1 and NEMA 12

Technical data, line supply 3 x 380 - 460 VAccording to international requirements

VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type 53505350535053505350 54505450545054505450 55005500550055005500 56005600560056005600


2. American Wire Gauge.3. See Line Connection section in this manual for fuse types.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


1) aa: Min. air-space above enclosure to other parts. bb: Min. air-space below enclosure to other parts.

Mechanical dimensionsAll measurements in inches.

VLT type A B C a b aa/bb1) Type

Chassis 200-240 V5042 - 5062 31.5 14.6 13.2 30.7 10.6 8.8 B

Chassis 380-460 V5075 - 5125 31.5 14.6 13.2 30.7 10.6 8.8 B5150 - 5300 55.1 16.5 15.7 54.3 13.8 8.8 B5350 - 5600 74.7 43.3 19.3 - - 15.7 (aa) H

NEMA 1 200-240 V5006 - 5011 22.0 9.5 10.2 21.2 7.9 7.9 D5016 - 5022 27.6 9.5 10.2 26.8 7.9 7.9 D5027 - 5032 31.5 12.1 11.7 30.7 10.6 7.9 D5042 - 5062 34.2 14.6 13.2 30.7 10.6 8.8 E

NEMA 1 380-460 V5006 - 5011 15.6 8.7 7.9 15.1 7.9 4.0 C5016 - 5027 22.0 29.5 10.2 21.2 7.9 7.9 D5032 - 5042 27.6 29.5 10.2 26.8 7.9 7.9 D5052 - 5062 31.5 12.1 11.7 30.7 10.6 7.9 D5075 - 5125 34.2 14.6 13.2 30.7 10.6 8.8 E5150 - 5300 61.6 16.5 15.7 54.3 13.8 8.8 E5350 - 5600 79.1 47.2 23.6 - - 5.7 (aa) H

VLT type A B C D a b a/b TypeNEMA 12 200-240 V5006 - 5011 31.9 14.0 11.0 2.8 22.0 13.0 7.9 F5016 - 5032 37.0 15.7 11.0 2.8 27.2 14.8 7.9 F5042 - 5062 36.9 19.5 16.6 - 32.7 14.7 8.8 G

NEMA 12 380-460 V5006 - 5011 20.9 11.1 7.7 3.3 13.0 10.1 4.0 F5016 - 5032 31.9 14.0 11.0 2.8 22.0 13.0 7.9 F5042 - 5062 37.0 15.7 11.0 2.8 27.2 14.8 7.9 F5075 - 5125 36.9 19.5 16.6 - 32.7 14.7 8.8 G5150 - 5300 61.9 19.5 16.7 - 57.7 17.5 8.8 G5350 - 5600 79.1 47.2 23.6 - - 15.7 (aa) H

Option for Chassis VLT 5075-5300 A1 B1 C1NEMA 1 bottom cover5075 - 5125 6.9 14.6 13.25150 - 5300 6.9 16.5 15.7

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Mechanical dimensions

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Mechanical dimensions (cont.)

Type H,chassis, NEMA 1, NEMA 12

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Mechanical installationPlease pay attention to the requirementsthat apply to integration and fieldmounting kit, see the below list. The

information given in the list must be observed to avoidserious damage or injury, especially when installinglarge units.

The VLT AFD must be installed vertically.

The VLT AFD is cooled by means of air circulation. Forthe unit to be able to release its cooling air, the mini-mum distance over and below the unit must be asshown in the illustration below.To protect the unit from overheating, it must be ensuredthat the ambient temperature does not rise above themax. temperature stated for the VLT AFD and that the24-hour average temperature is not exceeded. Themax. temperature and 24-hour average can be seenfrom the General Technical Data.If the ambient temperature is in the range of 45°C -55°C, derating of the VLT AFD will become relevant,see Derating for ambient temperature.The service life of the VLT AFD will be reduced ifderating for ambient temperature is not taken intoaccount.

Spacing when installing of VLT 5006-5011 380-460 V NEMA 1, Compact NEMA 1 and NEMA 12.

Cooling

All the above-mentioned units require a minimumspace of 4 inches above and below the enclosure.

Side-by-side

All the above-mentioned units can be installed side byside without any space, since these units do notrequire any cooling on the sides.

Enclosure protectionChassis NEMA1 NEMA12

VLT 5006-5032 200-240 V - OK OKVLT 5006-5600 380-460 V OK OK OK

Field-mountingChassis NEMA1 NEMA12

Bookstyle

VLT 5006-5032 200-240 V - No OKVLT 5006-5600 380-460 V No No OK

NEMA 1 with 4x top coverVLT 5006-5016 380-460 V - OK OK

NEMA 1 terminal coverVLT 5006-5032 200-240 V - OK OKVLT 5022-5062 380-460 V - OK OK

4

4

4

4

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Installation of VLT 5006-5032 200-240 V, VLT 5016-5062 380-460 V Chassis NEMA 1 and NEMA 12

Side-by-side

VLT 5075-5300 Chassis and NEMA 12

All Chassis and NEMA 1 units in the above-mentioned se-ries can be installed side by side without any spacing.

Cooling

VLT 5075-5300

Cooling

All units in the above-mentioned series require aminimum space of 8 inches above and below theenclosure and must be installed on a plane, verticalsurface (no spacers). This applies both to Chassis,NEMA 1 and NEMA 12.These units can be installed side by side without anyspacing, since they do not require any cooling on thesides.

Side-by-side

Chassis/NEMA 1

NEMA 12 (flange-by-flange)

Installation of VLT 5042-5062 200-240 V, VLT 5075-5300 380-460 V Chassis, NEMA 1 and NEMA 12

All units require a minimum space of 10 inchesabove and below the enclosure and must be installedon a plane, vertical surface (no spacers). This applies toChassis, NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 units alike.

VLT 5075-5300 NEMA 12

8

8

8

8

10

10

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Installation of VLT 5350-5600 380-500 V Compact IP 00, IP 20 and IP 54

Cooling

All units in the above-mentioned series require aminimum space of 15.8 inches above the enclosureand must be installed on a plane floor. This applies toboth chassis, NEMA 1 and NEMA12 units.For accessing the VLT 5350-5600 AQUA it require aminimum space of 23.8 inches in front of the VLTAFD.

Side-by-side

Compact chassis, NEMA 1, NEMA 12All chassis, NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 units in the above-mentioned series can be installed side by side withoutany space between them, since these units do notrequire cooling on the sides.

15.8 inches

VLT® 5000 AQUA


High voltage warningThe voltage of the AFD is dangerous whenever theequipment is connected to line. Incorrect installation of the motor or the AFD may cause damage tothe equipment, serious personal injury or death.

Consequently, the instructions in this manual,as well as national and local safety regulations, mustbe complied with.Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even afterdisconnection from line:using VLT 5006-5300 wait at least 15 minutes.

NOTE: is the user's or certified electrician's responsibility toensure correct grounding and protection in accordancewith applicable national and local norms and standards.

GroundingThe following basic issues need to be considered wheninstalling a AFD.

••••• Safety grSafety grSafety grSafety grSafety grounding: ounding: ounding: ounding: ounding: Please note that the AFD has a highleakage current and must be grounded appropriately forsafety reasons. Apply local safety regulations.

• High-frHigh-frHigh-frHigh-frHigh-frequency grequency grequency grequency grequency grounding: ounding: ounding: ounding: ounding: Keep the ground wireconnections as short as possible.

Connect the different ground systems at the lowest possibleconductor impedance. The lowest possible conductorimpedance is obtained by keeping the conductor as short aspossible and by using the greatest possible surface area. A flatconductor, for example, has a lower HF impedance than a roundconductor for the same conductor cross-section CVESS.If more than one device is installed in cabinets, the cabinet rearplate, which must be made of metal, should be used as acommon ground reference plate. The metal cabinets of thedifferent devices are mounted on the cabinet rear plate usingthe lowest possible HF impedance. This avoids having differentHF voltages for the individual devices and avoids the risk of ra-dio interference currents running in connection cables that maybe used between the devices. The radio interference will havebeen reduced.In order to obtain a low HF impedance, use the fastening boltsof the devices as HF connection to the rear plate. It isnecessary to remove insulating paint or similar from thefastening points.

CablesControl cables and the filtered line cable should beinstalled separate from the motor cables so as to avoidinterference overcoupling. Normally, a distance of 8inches will be sufficient, but it is recommended to keepthe greatest possible distance wherever possible,especially where cables are installed in parallel over asubstantial distance.

With respect to sensitive signal cables, such astelephone cables and data cables, the greatest possibledistance is recommended with a minimum of 3 feet per15 feet of power cable (line and motor cable). It must bepointed out that the necessary distance depends on thesensitivity of the installation and the signal cables, andthat therefore no precise values can be stated.

If cable jaws are used, sensitive signal cables are not tobe placed in the same cable jaws as the motor cable orbrake cable.If signal cables are to cross power cables, this should bedone at an angle of 90 degrees.Remember that all interference-filled in- or outgoingcables to/from a cabinet should be shielded/armored orfiltered.

Shielded/armored cablesThe shield must be a low HF-impedance shield. This isensured by using a braided shield of copper, aluminiumor iron. Shield armor intended for mechanical protection,for example, is not suitable.

General information about electrical installation

It

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

High voltage testA high voltage test can be carried out by short-circuiting terminals U, V, W, L1, L2 and L3 and energizingby max. 2.5 kV DC for one second between this short-circuit and the chassis.

NOTE:The RFI switch must be closed (position ON)when high voltage tests are carried out .

The line and motor connection must be interrupted inthe case of high voltage tests of the total installation ifthe leakage currents are too high.

Heat emission from VLT 5000 AQUAThe tables in General technical data show the powerloss PΦ(W) from VLT 5000 AQUA. The maximum coolingair temperature tIN, MAX is 40° at 100% load (of ratedvalue).

Ventilation of integrated VLT 5000 AQUAThe quantity of air required for cooling AFD can becalculated as follows:

1. Add up the values of PΦ for all the AFDs to beintegrated in the same panel.The highest cooling air temperature (tIN) presentmust be lower than tIN, MAX (40°C).The day/night average must be 5°C lower.The outlet temperature of the cooling air must notexceed: tOUT, MAX (45° C).

2. Calculate the permissible difference between thetemperature of the cooling air (tIN) and its outlettemperature (tOUT):∆t= 45° C-tIN.

3. Calculate the required

quantity of air = m3/h

Insert ∆t in Kelvin

The outlet from the ventilation must be placed above thehighest-mounted AFD.Allowance must be made for the pressure loss acrossthe filters and for the fact that the pressure is going todrop as the filters are choked.

∆t

ΣPϕ x 3.1

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Grounding of shielded/armored control cablesGenerally speaking, control cables must be shielded/armored and the shield must be connected by meansof a cable clamp at both ends to the metal cabinet ofthe unit.

The drawing below indicates how correct grounding iscarried out.

Correct groundingControl cables and cables for serial communicationmust be fitted with cable clamps at both ends to ensurethe best possible electrical contact.

Wrong groundingDo not use twisted cable ends (pigtails), since theseincrease the shield impedance at high frequencies.

Protection with respect to ground potentialbetween PLC and VLTIf the ground potential between the VLT AFD and thePLC (etc.) is different, electric noise may occur that willdisturb the whole system. This problem can be solvedby fitting an equalizing cable, to be placed next to thecontrol cable. Minimum cable cross-section: 8 AWG.

For 50/60 Hz ground loopsIf very long control cables are used, 50/60 Hz groundloops may occur that will disturb the whole system.This problem can be solved by connecting one end ofthe shield to via a ground 100nF capacitor (keepingleads short).

Cables for serial communicationLow-frequency noise currents between two VLT AFDcan be eliminated by connecting one end of the shieldto terminal 61. This terminal is connected to ground viaan internal RC link. It is recommended to use twisted-pair cables to reduce the differential mode interferencebetween the conductors.

Min. 8 AWG

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

VLT 5000 AQUA enclosures

Chassis/NEMA 1VLT 5006-5011, 380-460 V

NEMA 12VLT 5006-5011, 380-460 V

Chassis/NEMA 1VLT 5006-5032, 200-240 VVLT 5016-5062, 380-460 V

VLT® 5000 AQUA


VLT 5000 AQUA enclosures

NEMA 12VLT 5006-5032, 200-240 VVLT 5016-5062, 380-460 V

NEMA 1VLT 5042-5062, 200-240 VVLT 5075-5125, 380-460 V

ChassisVLT 5042-5062, 200-240 VVLT 5075-5125, 380-460 V

NEMA 12VLT 5042-5062, 200-240 VVLT 5075-5125, 380-460 V

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

NEMA 1VLT 5150-5300, 380-460 V

ChassisVLT 5150-5300, 380-460 V

NEMA 12VLT 5150-5300, 380-460 V

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Electrical installation, enclosures

Compact NEMA 1 / NEMA 12VLT 5350-5600 AQUA, 380-500 V

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

NEMA 1/NEMA 12VLT 5006-5011, 380-460 V


NEMA 12VLT 5006-5032, 200-240 VVLT 5016-5062, 380-460 V

Electrical installation, power cables

VLT® 5000 AQUA


NEMA 12VLT 5150-5300, 380-460 V

Chassis/NEMA 1VLT 5150-5300, 380-460 V


NEMA 12VLT 5042-5062, 200-240 VVLT 5075-5125, 380-460 V

Electrical installation, power cables

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Tightening-up torque and screw sizesThe table shows the torque required when fittingterminals to the VLT AFD. For VLT 5006-5032, 200 -240 V, VLT 5006-5062, 380-460 V the cables must befastened with screws. For VLT 5042-5062, 200-240 Vand for VLT 5075-5300 the cables must be fastenedwith bolts.These figures apply to the following terminals:

Line terminals

Motor terminals

Ground terminal

VLT type Tightening-up Screw3 x 200-240 V torque sizeVLT 5006-5011 16 ln lb M4VLT 5016-5027 27 ln lb M5VLT 5032 36 ln lb M6

VLT type Tightening-up Bolt3 x 200-240 V torque sizeVLT 5042-5062 100 ln lb M8

VLT type Tightening-up Screw3 x 380-460 V torque sizeVLT 5006-5011 4.5 - 5 ln lb M3VLT 5016-5027 16 ln lb M4VLT 5032-5062 27 ln lb M5

VLT type Tightening-up Bolt3 x 380-460 V torque sizeVLT 5075-5125 100 ln lb M8VLT 5150-5300 100 ln lb M8VLT 5350-5600 375 In lb M12

Line connectionLine must be connected to terminals 91, 92, 93.

Line voltage 3 x 200-240 VLine voltage 3 x 380-460 V

NOTE:Check that the line voltage corresponds to theline voltage of the VLT AFD, which can be seen

from the nameplate.

See Technical data for correct sizing of cable cross-sections.

Nos. 91, 92, 93 L1, L2, L3

Nos. 96, 97, 98 U, V, W

No. 99

Nos. 91, 92, 93 L1, L2, L3

The voltage of the adjustable frequencydrive is dangerous when the unit isconnected to the AC line. Incorrect

installation of the motor or the VLT adjustablefrequency drive may lead to material damage,serious injury or death. Follow the instructions of thismanual and comply to the National Electrical Code(NEC) and local codes and safety guidelines. DONOT touch the electrical components of the VLTadjustable frequency drive for at least 15 minutesafter the AC line has been disconnected.

NOTE:It is the responsability of the user or installer toensure that proper grounding, branch circuit

and motor overload protection is in accordance withthe NEC and local safety codes.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


1. Fuses designed for protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 Amps rms(symmetrical), 250 V maximum.

2. Fuses designed for protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100,000 Amps rms(symmetrical), 500 V maximum.

3. Auxiliary Fan use Littelfuse KLK-15.4. Fuses are provided in units with Disconnect Option.

Substitutions:Substitutions:Substitutions:Substitutions:Substitutions:Bussmann KTS-R Fuses can be substituted for Bussmann KTN-R Fuses of the same amperage.Bussmann FWH Fuses can be substituted for Bussmann FWX Fuses of the same amperage.Bussmann JJN Fuses can be substituted for Bussmann KTN-R Fuses of the same amperage.Bussmann JJS Fuses can be substituted for Bussmann KTS-R Fuses of the same amperage.

Customer Supplied Input Power Fuses for VLCustomer Supplied Input Power Fuses for VLCustomer Supplied Input Power Fuses for VLCustomer Supplied Input Power Fuses for VLCustomer Supplied Input Power Fuses for VLT AQUA Drives in UL/cUL ApplicationsT AQUA Drives in UL/cUL ApplicationsT AQUA Drives in UL/cUL ApplicationsT AQUA Drives in UL/cUL ApplicationsT AQUA Drives in UL/cUL Applications(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)

200 - 240 Volts200 - 240 Volts200 - 240 Volts200 - 240 Volts200 - 240 Volts11111 380 - 460 Volts380 - 460 Volts380 - 460 Volts380 - 460 Volts380 - 460 Volts22222

VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type Fuse typeFuse typeFuse typeFuse typeFuse type VLVLVLVLVLT typeT typeT typeT typeT type Fuse typeFuse typeFuse typeFuse typeFuse type5006 Bussmann KTN-R 50 5006 Bussmann KTS-R 205008 Bussmann KTN-R 50 5008 Bussmann KTS-R 255011 Bussmann KTN-R 50 5011 Bussmann KTS-R 305016 Bussmann KTN-R 60 5016 Bussmann KTS-R 405022 Bussmann KTN-R 80 5022 Bussmann KTS-R 405027 Bussmann KTN-R 125 5027 Bussmann KTS-R 505032 Bussmann KTN-R 125 5032 Bussmann KTS-R 6050423 Bussmann FWX 150 5042 Bussmann KTS-R 8050523 Bussmann FWX 200 5052 Bussmann KTS-R 10050623 Bussmann FWX 250 5062 Bussmann KTS-R 125

50753 Bussmann FWH 15051003 Bussmann FWH 20051253 Bussmann FWH 25051503 Bussmann FWH 30052003 Bussmann FWH 35052503 Bussmann FWH 40053003 Bussmann FWH 50053503, 4 Bussmann FWH 60054503, 4 Bussmann FWH 70055003, 4 Bussmann FWH 80056003, 4 Bussmann FWH 800

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

InterInterInterInterInternal Fuses Prnal Fuses Prnal Fuses Prnal Fuses Prnal Fuses Provided with VLovided with VLovided with VLovided with VLovided with VLT AQUA DrivesT AQUA DrivesT AQUA DrivesT AQUA DrivesT AQUA Drives(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)(Use specified fuse or exact replacement only)

200 - 240 VAC200 - 240 VAC200 - 240 VAC200 - 240 VAC200 - 240 VACVLT Type Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Power Card FusePower Card FusePower Card FusePower Card FusePower Card Fuse

(3X)(3X)(3X)(3X)(3X) (1X) (1X) (1X) (1X) (1X) (1X)(1X)(1X)(1X)(1X)5042 Littelfuse KLK-15 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 Bussmann KTK-55052 Littelfuse KLK-15 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 Bussmann KTK-55062 Littelfuse KLK-15 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 Bussmann KTK-5

380 - 460 VAC380 - 460 VAC380 - 460 VAC380 - 460 VAC380 - 460 VACVLT Type Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Soft Charge Resistor Power Card FusePower Card FusePower Card FusePower Card FusePower Card Fuse

(3X)(3X)(3X)(3X)(3X) (1X or 2X) (1X or 2X) (1X or 2X) (1X or 2X) (1X or 2X) (1X)(1X)(1X)(1X)(1X)5075 Littelfuse KLK-15 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X) Bussmann KTK-55100 Littelfuse KLK-15 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X) Bussmann KTK-55125 Littelfuse KLK-15 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X) Bussmann KTK-55150 Littelfuse KLK-30 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (1X) Bussmann KTK-55200 Littelfuse KLK-30 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X) Bussmann KTK-55250 Littelfuse KLK-30 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X) Bussmann KTK-55300 Littelfuse KLK-30 Littelfuse KLK-D-12 (2X) Bussmann KTK-5VLT Type Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Soft Charge Fuse Line Snubber Fuse Line Snubber Fuse Line Snubber Fuse Line Snubber Fuse Line Snubber Fuse Interface Board FuseInterface Board FuseInterface Board FuseInterface Board FuseInterface Board Fuse

(3X)(3X)(3X)(3X)(3X) (3X) (3X) (3X) (3X) (3X) (1X)(1X)(1X)(1X)(1X)5350 Littelfuse KLK-9 Littelfuse KLK-15 Bussmann KTK-55450 Littelfuse KLK-9 Littelfuse KLK-15 Bussmann KTK-55500 Littelfuse KLK-9 Littelfuse KLK-15 Bussmann KTK-55600 Littelfuse KLK-9 Littelfuse KLK-15 Bussmann KTK-5

Soft Charge Fuses and Input Snubber Fuses

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Line-fusesFor VLT type 5006-5300, external line-fuses mustbe installed in the line supply to the AFD. For UL/cUL applications with a line voltage of 200-240 V,line-fuses of type Bussmann KTN-R (200-240 V).For UL/cUL applications with a line voltage of 380-460 V, line-fuses of type Bussmann KTS-R (380-460 V).

See Technical data for correct sizing of line-fuses.

Motor connectionThe motor must be connected to terminals 96, 97,98. Ground to terminal 99.

Motor voltage 0-100% ofline voltage.Ground connection.

See Technical data for correct sizing of cable cross-sections.

All types of three-phase asynchronous standardmotors can be used with a VLT 5000 AQUA unit.

Small-size motors are normally star-connected.(220/380 V, ∆/Y). Large-size motors are delta-connected (380/660 V, ∆/Y).The correct connection and voltage can be readfrom the motor nameplate.

NOTE:In older motors without phase coil insulation,a LC filter should be fitted to the VLT AFD

output. See the Design Guide or contact Danfoss.

Nos. 96, 97, 98 U, V, WNo. 99

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Motor cablesSee Technical data for correct sizing of motor cablecross-section and length.Always comply with national and local regulations oncable cross-sections. Parallel coupling of motors

VLT 5000 AQUA is able to control several motorsconnected in parallel. If the motors are to have diffe-rent rpm values, the motors must have different ratedrpm values. Motor rpm is changed simultaneously,which means that the ratio between the rated rpmvalues is maintained across the range.

The total current consumption of the motors is not toexceed the maximum rated output current IVLT,N for theVLT AFD.

Direction of motor rotation

The factory setting is for clockwise rotation with theVLT frequency transformer output connected asfollows.

Terminal 96 connected to U-phaseTerminal 97 connected to V-phaseTerminal 98 connected to W-phase

The direction of rotation can be changed byswitching two phases in the motor cable.

Problems may arise at the start and at low rpm values ifthe motor sizes are widely different. This is because therelatively high ohmic resistance in small motors calls for ahigher voltage at the start and at low rpm values.

In systems with motors connected in parallel, theelectronic thermal relay (ETR) of the VLT AFD cannot beused as motor protection for the individual motor.Consequently, additional motor protection is required,such as thermistors in ground motor (or individual thermalrelays).

NOTE:Parameter 107 Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMAand Automatic Energy Optimization, AEO in para-meter 101 Torque characteristics cannot be used if

motors are connected in parallel.

Motor thermal protectionThe electronic thermal relay in UL-approved VLT AFDhas received UL-approval for single motor protection,as long as parameter 117 Motor thermal protection hasbeen set to ETR Trip and parameter 105 Motor current,IVLT,N has been programmed for the rated motor current(can be read from the motor nameplate).

Ground connectionSince the leakage currents to ground may be higherthan 3.5 mA, the VLT AFD must always be grounded inaccordance with applicable national and localregulations. In order to ensure good mechanicalconnection of the ground cable, its cable cross-sectionmust be at least 8 AWG. For added security, an RCD(Residual Current Device) may be installed. This ensuresthat the VLT AFD will cut out if the leakage currents gettoo high.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


DC bus connectionThe DC bus terminal is used for DC back-up, with theintermediate circuit being supplied from an externalDC source.

Terminal nos.

Contact Danfoss if you require further information.

High-voltage relayThe cable for the high-voltage relay must beconnected to terminals 01, 02, 03. The high-voltagerelay is programmed in parameter 323, Relay 1,output.

Relay output 11+3 break, 1+2 make.Max. 240 V AC, 2 Amp.Min. 24 V DC, 10 mA or24 V AC, 100 mA.

Max. cross-section: 4 mm2/10 AWG.Torque: 4.5 - 5 ln lb.Screw size: M3.

No. 1

Nos. 88, 89

Control cardAll terminals for the control cables are located underthe protective cover of the VLT AFD.The protective cover (see drawing below) can be re-moved by means of a pointed object - a screwdriveror similar.

Electrical installation, control cables

Torque: 4.5 - 5 ln lbScrew size: M3.

Generally speaking, control cables must be shielded/armored and the shield must be connected by meansof a cable clamp at both ends to the metal cabinet ofthe unit (see Grounding of shielded (armoured controlcables).Normally, the shield must also be connected to thebody of the controlling unit (follow the instructions forinstallation given for the unit in question).If very long control cables are used, 50/60 Hz groundloops may occur that will disturb the whole system.This problem can be solved by connecting one end ofthe shield to ground via a 100nF capacitor (keepingleads short).

Installation of 24 Volt external DC supply:Torque: 0.5 - 0.6 NmScrew size: M3No. Function

24 V external DC supply

24 V external DC supply can be used as low-voltagesupply to the control card and any option cardsinstalled. This enables full operation of the LCP (incl.parameter setting) without connection to mains.Please note that a warning of low voltage will be givenwhen 24 V DC has been connected; however, therewill be no tripping. If 24 V external DC supply isconnected or switched on at the same time as themains supply, a time of min. 200 msec. must be set inparameter 111, Start delay.A pre-fuse of min. 6 Amp, slow-blow, can be fitted toprotect the external 24 V DC supply. The powerconsumption is 15-50 W, depending on the load onthe control card.

NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:Use 24 V DC supply of type PELUse 24 V DC supply of type PELUse 24 V DC supply of type PELUse 24 V DC supply of type PELUse 24 V DC supply of type PELV to ensurV to ensurV to ensurV to ensurV to ensureeeeecorrcorrcorrcorrcorrect galvanic isolation (type PELect galvanic isolation (type PELect galvanic isolation (type PELect galvanic isolation (type PELect galvanic isolation (type PELV) on theV) on theV) on theV) on theV) on thecontrcontrcontrcontrcontrol terminals of the VLol terminals of the VLol terminals of the VLol terminals of the VLol terminals of the VLT AFD.T AFD.T AFD.T AFD.T AFD.

35 (-), 36 (+)

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

No. FunctionAnalog current input 0/4-20 mA.See parameters 314-316 Terminal 60.

Termination of serial communication. SeeGrounding of shielded (armoured controlcables.This terminal is not normally to be used.

RS 485 interface, serial communication.Where the VLT AFD is connected to a bus,switches 2 and 3 (switches 1- 4 - see nextpage) must be closed on the first and thelast VLT AFD. On the remaining VLT AFD,switches 2 and 3 must be open. The factorysetting is closed (position on).

Switches 1-4The dipswitch is located on the control card.It is used for serial communication and external DCsupply.The switching position shown is the factory setting.

Switch 1 has no function.Switches 2 and 3 are used for terminating an RS 485 in-terface, serial communication. In the first and the last VLTAFD, switches 2 and 3 must be ON. In the other VLTAFD, switches 2 and 3 must be OFF.Switch 4 is used if an external 24 V DC supply is requiredfor the control terminals.Switch 4 separates the common potential for the internal24 V DC supply from the common potential of theexternal 24 V DC supply.

NOTE:Please note that when Switch 4 is in position"OFF", the external 24 V DC supply is galvanicallyisolated from the VLT AFD.

Electrical installation, control cablesTorque: 4.5 - 5 ln lbScrew size: M3See Grounding of shielded (armoured control cablesfor correct termination of control cables.

No. FunctionRelay output 1 can be used for indicatingstatus and warnings.

Voltage supply to digital inputs. For the24 V DC to be used for digital inputs,switch 4 on the control card must beclosed, position "on".

Digital inputs. See parameters 300-307Digital inputs.

Common for digital inputs.

Common for analog/digital outputs. Mustbe connnected to terminal 55 by meansof a three-wire transmitter. See Examplesof connection.

Analog/digital outputs for indicatingfrequency, reference, current and torque.See parameters 319-322 Analoge/digitaloutputs.

Supply voltage to potentiometer andthermistor 10 V DC.

Analog voltage input, 0 - 10 V DC.

Common for analog voltage inputs.

61

68, 69

12, 13

16-33

20

39

42, 45

50

53, 54

55

04, 05

60

VLT® 5000 AQUA


In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in thescreen, the cable screen can be grounded via termi-nal 61, which is connected to the frame via an RC-link.

Bus terminationThe bus must be terminated by a resistor network atboth ends. For this purpose, set switches 2 and 3 onthe control card for "ON".

Bus connectionBus connectionBus connectionBus connectionBus connectionThe serial bus connection in accordance with theRS 485 (2-conductor) norm is connected to terminals68/69 of the AFD (signals P and N). Signal P is thepositive potential (TX+,RX+), while signal N is thenegative potential (TX-,RX-).

If more than one AFD is to be connected to a givenmaster, use parallel connections.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Connection example, VLT 5000 AQUAThe diagram below gives an example of a typical VLT5000 AQUA installation.The line supply is connected to terminals 91 (L1), 92(L2) and 93 (L3), while the motor is connected to 96(U), 97 (V) and 98 (W). These numbers can also beseen from the terminals of the VLT AFD.An external DC supply can be connected to terminals88 and 89 (VLT 5006-5062 AQUA, 200-240V and VLT5016-5300 AQUA, 460V).Analog inputs can be connected to terminals 53 [V], 54[V] and 60 [mA]. These inputs can be programmed foreither reference, feedback or thermistor. See Analoginputs in parameter group 300.

There are 8 digital inputs, which can be connected toterminals 16-19, 27, 29, 32, 33. These inputs can beprogrammed in accordance with the table in Inputsand outputs 300-328.There are two analog/digital outputs (terminals 42 and45), which can be programmed to show the presentstatus or a process value, such as 0-fMAX. Relayoutputs 1 and 2 can be used for giving the presentstatus or a warning.On terminals 68 (P+) and 69 (N-) RS 485 interface,the VLT AFD can be controlled and monitored viaserial communication.

* These terminals can be programmed for other functions.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Connection examplesSingle-pole start/stop

- Start/stop using terminal 18.Parameter 302 = Start [1]

- Quick-stop using terminal 27.Parameter 304 = Coasting stop, inverse [0]

Digital speed up/down

- Speed up and down using terminals 32 and 33.Parameter 306 = Speed up [7]Parameter 307 = Speed down [7]Parameter 305 = Freeze reference [2]

Potentiometer reference

- Parameter 308 = Reference [1]Parameter 309 = Terminal 53, min. scalingParameter 310 = Terminal 53, max. scaling

- Start permitted with terminal 16.Parameter 300 = Start enabled [8].

- Start/stop with terminal 18.Parameter 302 = Start [1].

- Quickstop with terminal 27.Parameter 304 = Coasting stop, inverse [0].

- Activated peripheral equipParameter 323 = Start command active [13].

Run permissive

2-zone regulation

- Parameter 308 = Feedback [2].- Parameter 311 = Feedback [2].

Transmitter connection

- Parameter 314 = Reference [1]

- Parameter 315 = Terminal 60, min. scaling

- Parameter 316 = Terminal 60, max. scaling

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Control unit LCPThe front of the VLT AFD features a control panel -LCP (Local Control Panel). This is a complete inter-face for operation and programming of the VLT 5000AQUA.The control panel is detachable and can - as an al-ternative - be installed up to 10 feet away from theVLT AFD, e.g. on the front panel, by means of amounting kit option.The functions of the control panel can be divided intofive groups:1. Display2. Keys for changing display mode3. Keys for changing program parameters4. Indicator lamps5. Keys for local operation.All data are indicated by means of a 4-line alpha-numeric display, which, in normal operation, is able toshow 4 operating data values and 3 operatingcondition values continuously. During programming,all the information required for quick, effectiveparameter Setup of the VLT AFD will be displayed.As a supplement to the display, there are threeindicator lamps for voltage (ON), warning(WARNING) and alarm (ALARM), respectively.All VLT AFD parameter Setups can be changedimmediately via the control panel, unless thisfunction has been programmed to be Locked [1] viaparameter 016 Lock for data change or via a digitalinput, parameters 300-307 Lock for data change.

Control keys for parameter SetupThe control keys are divided into functions. Thismeans that the keys between display and indicatorlamps are used for parameter Setup, includingselecting the display indication during normaloperation.

[DISPLAY / STATUS] is used for selecting theindication mode of the display or whenreturning to the Display mode from either theQuick menu or the Extend menu mode.

[QUICK MENU] gives access to theparameters used for the Quick menu. It ispossible to switch between the Quickmenu and the Extend menu modes.

[EXTEND MENU] gives access to allparameters. It is possible to switchbetween the Extend menu and the Quickmenu modes.

[CHANGE DATA] is used for changing asetting selected either in the Extend menuor the Quick menu mode.

[CANCEL] is used if a change of the selec-ted parameter is not to be carried out.

[OK] is used for confirming a change of theparameter selected.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


[+/-] is used for selecting parameters andfor changing a chosen parameter. Thesekeys are also used to change the local refe-rence.In addition, the keys are used in Displaymode to switch between operation variablereadouts.

[<>] is used when selecting a parametergroup and for moving the cursor whenchanging numerical values.

Indicator lampsAt the bottom of the control panel is a red alarm lampand a yellow warning lamp, as well as a green voltageLED.

red yellow green

If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or warning lamp is activated, and a status or alarm textis displayed.

NOTE:The voltage indicator lamp is activated when theVLT AFD receives voltage.

Local controlUnderneath the indicator lamps are keys for localcontrol.

[HAND START] is used if the VLT AFD is tobe controlled via the control unit. The VLTAFD will start the motor, since a startcommand is given by means of [HANDSTART].On the control terminals, the followingcontrol signals will still be active when[HAND START] is activated:• Hand start - Off stop - Auto start• Safety Interlock• Reset• Coasting stop inverse• Reversing• Setup select lsb - Setup select msb• Jog• Run permissive• Lock for data change

• Stop command from serial communication

NOTE:If parameter 201 Output frequency low limit fMIN

is set to an output frequency greater than 0 Hz,the motor will start and ramp up to this

frequency when [HAND START] is activated.

[OFF/STOP] is used for stopping the con-nected motor. Can be selected as Enable[1] or Disable [0] via parameter 013. If thestop function is activated, line 2 will flash.

[AUTO START] is used if the VLT AFD is tobe controlled via the control terminalsand/or serial communication. When astart signal is active on the controlterminals and/or the bus, the VLT AFD willstart.

NOTE:An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digi-tal inputs will have higher priority than the

control keys [HAND START]-[AUTO START].

[RESET] is used for resetting the VLT AFDafter an alarm (trip). Can be selected asEnable [1] or Disable [0] via parameter015 Reset on LCP.

Display modeIn normal operation, any 4 different operating variablescan be indicated continuously: 1.1 and 1.2 and 1.3and 2. The present operating status or alarms andwarnings that have arisen are shown in line 2 in theform of a number. In the case of alarms, the alarm inquestion will be shown in lines 3 and 4, accompaniedby an explanatory note. Warnings will flash in line 2,with an explanatory note in line 1. In addition, thedisplay shows the active Setup.The arrow indicates the direction of rotation; herethe VLT AFD has an active reversing signal. Thearrow body disappears if a stop command is given orif the output frequency falls below 0.01 Hz. Thebottom line gives the status of the VLT AFD. Seenext page.The scroll list on the next page gives the operatingdata that can be shown for variable 2 in display mode.Changes are made via the [+/-] keys.

VAR 2 SETUP

1

STATUS

VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Display mode I:VLT 5000 AQUA offers different display modes de-pending on the mode selected for the VLT AFD. Thefigure on the next page shows the way to navigatebetween different display modes.Below is a display mode, in which the VLT AFD is inAuto mode with remote reference at an outputfrequency of 40 Hz.In this display mode, reference and control are deter-mined via the control terminals.The text in line 1 gives the operating variable shown inline 2.

Line 2 gives the current output frequency and theactive Setup.Line 4 says that the VLT AFD is in Auto mode withremote reference, and that the motor is running.

Display mode, cont.The table below gives the operating data options forthe first and second line of the display.Scroll-list: Unit:

Resulting reference, % [%]Resulting reference, unit [unit]Frequency [Hz]% of maximum output frequency [%]Motor current [A]Power [kW]Power [HP]Output energy [kWh]Hours run [hours]Used-defined readout [unit]Setpoint 1 [unit]Setpoint 2 [unit]Feedback 1 [unit]Feedback 2 [unit]Feedback [unit]Motor voltage [V]DC-link voltage [V]Thermal load on motor [%]Thermal load on VLT [%]Input status, dig. input [binary code]Input status, analog terminal 53 [V]Input status, analog terminal 54 [V]Input status, analog terminal 60 [mA]Pulse reference [Hz]External reference [%]Heat sink temperature [°C]User-defined text [-]

Three operating data values can be shown in the firstdisplay line, while one operating variable can beshown in the second display line. To be programmedvia parameters 007, 008, 009 and 010 Displayreadout.

Ž Status line:

The left part of the status line indicates the control elementof the VLT AFD that is active. AUTO means that control isvia the control terminals, while HAND indicates thatcontrol is via the local keys on the control unit.OFF means that the VLT AFD ignores all controlcommands and stops the motor.The center part of the status line indicates the referenceelement that is active. REMOTE means that the referencefrom the control terminals is active, while LOCAL indicatesthat the reference is determined via the [+/-] keys on thecontrol panel.

The last part of the status line indicates the current status,for example "Running", "Stop" or "Alarm".

Display mode II:This display mode makes it possible to have three opera-ting data values displayed at the same time in line 1.The operating data values are determined in parameters007-010 Display readout.

SETUP

1

FREQUENCY

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

40.0Hz

50.0HzSETUP

1

100% 7,8A 5,9KW

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

SETUP

1

80.0% 5.08A 2.15kW

40.0Hz

HAND STOPRAMPINGJOGGING....

LOCALAUTO REMOTE RUNNING

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Display mode II

Display mode III:This display mode is active as long as the [DISPLAYMODE] key is kept depressed. In the first line, operatingdata names and units of operating data are displayed. Inthe second line, operating data 2 remains unchanged.When the key is released, the different operating datavalues are shown.

Display mode IV:This display mode is only active in connection with localreference, see also Reference handling.In this display mode, the reference is determined via the[+/-] keys and control is carried out by means of thekeys underneath the indicator lamps.The first line indicates the required reference.The third line gives the relative value of the presentoutput frequency at any given time in relation to themaximum frequency. The display is in the form of a bargraph.

Navigation between displaymodes

With remotereference

SETUP

1

USE +/- 40Hz

HAND LOCAL RUNNING

40.0Hz0 ----- 60

40.0Hz SETUP

1

80% 7,8A 5,9KW

40.0Hz SETUP

1

REF% CURR.A POW.,KW

Keep the [DISPLAYMODE] key down

Display mode I

Display mode IV

Display mode III

SETUP

1

FREQENCY

40.0Hz

With local reference

Press briefly

50.0HzSETUP

1

REF% CURR.A POW.,KW

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

SETUP

1

USE +/- 40Hz

40Hz0 ----- 60

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Changing dataRegardless of whether a parameter has beenselected under the Quick menu or the Extendedmenu, the procedure for changing data is the same.Pressing the [CHANGE DATA] key allows change ofthe selected parameter, and the underlining in line 4will flash on the display.The procedure for changing data depends onwhether the selected parameter represents anumerical data value or a functional value.If the chosen parameter represents a numeric datavalue, the first digit can be changed by means of the[+/-] keys. If the second digit is to be changed, firstmove the cursor by using the [<>] keys, then changethe data value using the [+/-] keys.

The selected digit is indicated by a flashing cursor. Thebottom display line gives the data value that will be ente-red (saved) when signing off by pressing the [OK] button.Use [CANCEL] to cancel the change.

If the selected parameter is a functional value, the selectedtext value can be changed by means of the [+/-] keys.

The functional value flashes until signing off by pressingthe [OK] button. The functional value has now beenselected. Use [CANCEL] to cancel the change.

3.90 A SETUP

1

MOTOR CURRENT

210 REFERENCE TYPE

SUM

24.2 Hz SETUP

1

FREQUENCY

205 MAX. REFERENCE

000050,000 Hz

Infinitely variable change of numeric data valueIf the chosen parameter represents a numeric datavalue, a digit is first selected by means of the [<>]keys.

Then the chosen digit is changed infinitely by meansof the [+/-] keys:

The chosen digit flashes.The bottom display line shows the data value that willbe entered (saved) when signing off with [OK].

50.0 HZSETUP

1

FREQUENCY

209 JOG FREQUENCY

50.0 HZSETUP

1

FREQUENCY

209 JOG FREQUENCY

10.0 HZ

09.0 HZ

Changing of data value, step-by-stepCertain parameters can be changed both step by stepand infinitely variably. This applies to Motor power (para-meter 102), Motor voltage (parameter 103) and Motorfrequency (parameter 104).This means that the parameters are changed both as agroup of numeric data values and as numeric data valuesinfinitely variably.

Manual initializationDisconnect from line and hold the [DISPLAY/STATUS] +[CHANGE DATA] + [OK] keys down while at the sametime reconnecting the line supply.Release the keys; the VLT AFD has now been program-med for the factory setting.

The following parameters are not reset by means of ma-nual initialization:

parameter 600, Operating hours

601, Hours run

602, kWh counter

603, Number of power-ups

604, Number of overtemperatures

605, Number of overvoltages

It is also possible to carry out initialization via parameter620 Operating mode

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Quick MenuThe QUICK MENU key gives access to 12 of themost important setup parameters of the drive.After programming, the drive will, in many cases,be ready for operation.

The 12 Quick Menu parameters are shown in thetable below. A complete description of the function isgiven in the parameter sections of this manual.

Quick Menu Parameter DescriptionItem Number Name

1 001 Language Selects language used for all displays.2 102 Motor Power Sets output characteristics of drive based on kW size

of motor.3 103 Motor Voltage Sets output characteristics of drive based on voltage

of motor.4 104 Motor Frequency Sets output characteristics of drive based on nominal

frequency of motor. This is typically equal to linefrequency.

5 105 Motor Current Sets output characteristics of drive based on nominalcurrent in amps of motor.

6 106 Motor Nominal Speed Sets output characteristics of drive based on nominalfull load speed of motor.

7 201 Minimum Frequency Sets minimum controlled frequency at which motorwill run.

8 202 Maximum Frequency Sets maximum controlled frequency at which motorwill run.

9 206 Ramp Up Time Sets time to accelerate motor from 0 Hz to nominalmotor frequency set in Quick Menu Item 4.

10 207 Ramp Down Time Sets time to decelerate motor from nominal motorfrequency set in Quick Menu Item 4 to 0 Hz.

11 323 Relay 1 Function Sets function of high voltage Form C relay.12 326 Relay 2 Function Sets function of low voltage Form A relay.

NOTE:PrPrPrPrProgramming of extended parametersogramming of extended parametersogramming of extended parametersogramming of extended parametersogramming of extended parametersfunctions available thrfunctions available thrfunctions available thrfunctions available thrfunctions available through Extended Menu keyough Extended Menu keyough Extended Menu keyough Extended Menu keyough Extended Menu key

is done in accoris done in accoris done in accoris done in accoris done in accordance with same prdance with same prdance with same prdance with same prdance with same procedurocedurocedurocedurocedure ase ase ase ase asdescribed for Quick Menu functions.described for Quick Menu functions.described for Quick Menu functions.described for Quick Menu functions.described for Quick Menu functions.

Parameter DataEnter or change parameter data or settings inaccordance with the following procedure.1. Press Quick Menu key.2. Use ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys to find parameter you chose

to edit.3. Press Change Data key.4. Use ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys to select correct parameter

setting. To move to a different digit withinparameter, use and arrows. Flashing cursorindicates digit selected to change.

5. Press Cancel key to disregard change, or pressOK key to accept change and enter new setting.

Example of Changing Parameter DataAssume parameter 206, Ramp Up Time, is set at 60seconds. Change the ramp up time to 100 seconds inaccordance with the following procedure.1. Press Quick Menu key.2. Press ‘+’ key until you reach Parameter 206,

Ramp Up Time.3. Press Change Data key.4. Press key twice – hundreds digit will flash.5. Press ‘+’ key once to change hundreds digit to

‘1.’6. Press key to change to tens digit.7. Press ‘-’ key until ‘6’ counts down to ‘0’ and

setting for Ramp Up Time reads ‘100 s.’8. Press OK key to enter new value into drive

controller.

= factory setting. ( ) = display text [ ] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

001 Language (LANGUAGE)Value:

English (ENGLISH) [0]German (DEUTSCH) [1]French (FRANCAIS) [2]Danish (DANSK) [3]Spanish (ESPAÑOL) [4]Italian (ITALIANO) [5]Swedish (SVENSKA) [6]Dutch (NEDERLANDS) [7]Portuguese (PORTUGUESA) [8]

State when delivered may vary from factory setting.

Function:The choice in this parameter defines the language tobe used on the display.

Description of choice:There is a choice of the languages indicated.

The Setup configurationVLT 5000 AQUA has four Setups (parameterSetups) that can be programmed independently ofeach other. The active Setup can be selected in pa-rameter 002 Active Setup. The active Setupnumber will be shown in the display under "Setup".It is also possible to set the VLT AFD to Multi-Setupto allow switching of Setups with the digital inputs orserial communication.Setup shifts can be used in systems where, oneSetup is used during the day and another at night.

Parameter 003 Copying of Setups enables copying fromone Setup to another.By means of parameter 004 LCP copy, all Setups can betransferred from one VLT AFD to another by moving thecontrol panel. First all parameter values are copied to thecontrol panel. This can then be moved to another VLTAFD, where all parameter values can be copied from thecontrol unit to the VLT AFD.

002 Active Setup (ACTIVE SETUP)Value:

Factory Setup (FACTORY SETUP) [0] Setup 1 (SETUP 1) [1]

Setup 2 (SETUP 2) [2]Setup 3 (SETUP 3) [3]Setup 4 (SETUP 4) [4]MultiSetup (MULTI SETUP) [5]

Function:The choice in this parameter defines the Setup numberyou want to control the functions of the VLT AFD.All parameters can be programmed in four individual para-meter Setups, Setup 1 - Setup 4.In addition, a pre-programmed Setup called the FactorySetup exists. This only allows specific parameters to bechanged.

Description of choice:Factory Setup [0] contains the parameter values pre-set atthe factory. Can be used as a data source if the otherSetups are to be returned to a common state. In this caseFactory Setup is selected as the active Setup.Setups 1-4 [1]-[4] are four individual Setups that can beselected as required.MultiSetup [5] is used if remote switching betweendifferent Setups is required. Terminals 16/17/29/32/33and the serial communication port can be used for switch-ing between Setups.

ProgrammingUsing the [EXTEND MENU] key, it ispossible to have access to all theparameters for the VLT AFD.

Operation and Display 001-017This parameter group allows to set up parameterssuch as language, display readout and the possibilityof making the function keys on the control unitinactive.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


004 LCP copy (LCP COPY)Value:

No copying (NO COPY) [0]Upload all parameters(UPLOAD ALL PARAMET.) [1]Download all parameters(DOWNLOAD ALL PARAM.) [2]Download power-independent par.(DOWNLOAD SIZE INDEP.) [3]

Function:Parameter 004 LCP copy is used if the integratedcopying function of the control panel is to be used.This function is used if all parameter Setups are to becopied from one VLT AFD to another by moving thecontrol panel.

Description of choice:Select Upload all parameters [1] if all parameter valuesare to be transmitted to the control panel.Select Download all parameters [2] if all transmittedparameter values are to be copied to the VLT AFD onwhich the control panel has been mounted.Select Download power-independent par. [3] if onlythe power-independent parameters are to bedownloaded. This is used if downloading to a VLTAFD that has a different rated power than the onefrom where the parameter Setup originates.

NOTE:Uploading/Downloading can only be carried outin the Stop mode.

Setup of user-defined readoutParameter 005 Max. value of user-defined readoutand 006 Unit for user-defined readout allow users todesign their own readout which can be seen if user-defined readout has been selected under displayreadout. The range is set in parameter 005 Max. valueof user-defined readout and the unit is determined inparameter 006 Unit for user-defined readout. Thechoice of unit decides whether the ratio between theoutput frequency and the readout is a linear, square orcubed ratio.

Connection examplesSetup change

- Selection of Setup using terminals 32 and 33.Parameter 306 = Selection of Setup, lsb [4]Parameter 307 = Selection of Setup, msb [4]Parameter 004 = MultiSetup [5].

003 Copying of Setups (SETUP COPY)Value:

No copying (NO COPY) [0]Copy active Setup to Setup 1(COPY TO SETUP 1) [1]Copy active Setup to Setup 2(COPY TO SETUP 2) [2]Copy active Setup to Setup 3(COPY TO SETUP 3) [3]Copy active Setup to Setup 4(COPY TO SETUP 4) [4]Copy active Setup to all (COPY TO ALL) [5]

Function:

A copy is made from the active Setup selected inparameter 002 Active Setup to the Setup or Setupsselected in parameter 003 Copying of Setups.

NOTE:Copying is only possible in Stop mode (motorstopped on a Stop command).

Description of choice:The copying starts when the required copying functionhas been selected and the [OK] key has beenpressed.The display indicates when copying is in progress.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

005 Max. value of user-defined readout(CUSTOM READOUT )

Value:

0.01 - 999,999.99 100.00

Function:This parameter allows a choice of the max. value ofthe user-defined readout. The value is calculated onthe basis of the present motor frequency and the unitselected in parameter 006 Unit for user-definedreadout. The programmed value is reached when theoutput frequency in parameter 202 Output frequencyhigh limit, fMAX is reached. The unit also decideswhether the ratio between output frequency andreadout is linear, square or cubed.

Description of choice:Set the required value for max. output frequency.

006 Unit for user-defined readout(CUST. READ. UNIT)

Value: No unit 1 [0] GPM 1 [21]

% 1 [1] gal/s 1 [22]rpm 1 [2] gal/min 1 [23]ppm 1 [3] gal/h 1 [24]pulse/s 1 [4] lb/s 1 [25]l/s 1 [5] lb/min 1 [26]l/min 1 [6] lb/h 1 [27]l/h 1 [7] CFM 1 [28]kg/s 1 [8] ft3/s 1 [29]kg/min 1 [9] ft3/min 1 [30]kg/h 1 [10] ft3/h 1 [31]m3/s 1 [11] ft3/min 1 [32]m3/min 1 [12] ft/s 1 [33]m3/h 1 [13] in wg 2 [34]m/s 1 [14] ft wg 2 [35]mbar 2 [15] PSI 2 [36]bar 2 [16] lb/in2 [37]Pa 2 [17] HP 3 [38]MPa 2 [18]MWG 2 [19]kW 3 [20]

Flow and speed units are marked with 1. Pressureunits with 2, and power units with 3. See figure in nextcolumn.

Function:Select a unit to be shown in the display in connection withparameter 005 Max. value of user-defined readout.If units such as flow or speed units are selected, the ratiobetween readout and output frequency will be a linearone.If pressure units are selected (bar, Pa, MWG, PSI, etc.),the ratio will be square.If power units (HP, HP) are selected, the ratio will becubed.The value and the unit are shown in display modewhenever User-defined readout [10] has been selected inone of parameters 007-010 Display readout.

Description of choice:Select the required unit for User-defined readout.

007 Large display readout (LARGE READOUT)Value:Resulting reference [%] (REFERENCE [%]) [1]Resulting reference [unit] (REFERENCE [UNIT]) [2]

Frequency [Hz] (FREQUENCY [HZ]) [3]% of maximum output frequency [%](FREQUENCY [%]) [4]Motor current [A] (MOTOR CURRENT [A]) [5]Power [kW] (POWER [kW]) [6]Power [HP] (POWER [HP]) [7]Output energy [kWh] (ENERGI [UNIT]) [8]Hours run [Hours] (HOURS RUN [h]) [9]User-defined readout [-](CUSTOM READ.[UNITS])) [10]Setpoint 1 [unit] (SETPOINT 1 [UNITS]) [11]Setpoint 2 [unit] (SETPOINT 2 [UNITS]) [12]


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Output energy [kWh]Output energy [kWh]Output energy [kWh]Output energy [kWh]Output energy [kWh] states the energy consumed bythe motor since the latest reset was made in parame-ter 618 Reset of kWh counter.Hours run [Hours]Hours run [Hours]Hours run [Hours]Hours run [Hours]Hours run [Hours] states the number of hours thatthe motor has run since the latest reset in parameter619 Reset of hours-run counter.UserUserUserUserUser-defined readout [-]-defined readout [-]-defined readout [-]-defined readout [-]-defined readout [-] is a user-defined value,calculated on the basis of the present outputfrequency and unit, as well as the scaling inparameter 005 Max. value of user-defined readout.Select unit in parameter 006 Unit for user-definedreadout.Setpoint 1 [unit]Setpoint 1 [unit]Setpoint 1 [unit]Setpoint 1 [unit]Setpoint 1 [unit] is the programmed setpoint value inparameter 418 Setpoint 1. The unit is decided inparameter 415 Process units. See also Feedbackhandling.Setpoint 2 [unitSetpoint 2 [unitSetpoint 2 [unitSetpoint 2 [unitSetpoint 2 [unit] is the programmed setpoint value inparameter 419 Setpoint 2. The unit is decided inparameter 415 Process units.Feedback 1 [unit]Feedback 1 [unit]Feedback 1 [unit]Feedback 1 [unit]Feedback 1 [unit] gives the signal value of theresulting feedback 1 (Term. 53). The unit is decidedin parameter 415 Process units. See also Feedbackhandling.Feedback 2 [unit]Feedback 2 [unit]Feedback 2 [unit]Feedback 2 [unit]Feedback 2 [unit] gives the signal value of theresulting feedback 2 (Term. 53). The unit is decidedin parameter 415 Process units.Feedback [unit]Feedback [unit]Feedback [unit]Feedback [unit]Feedback [unit] gives the resulting signal value usingthe unit/scaling selected in parameter 413 Minimumfeedback, FBMIN, 414 Maximum feedback, FBMAX and415 Process units.Motor voltage [V]Motor voltage [V]Motor voltage [V]Motor voltage [V]Motor voltage [V] states the voltage supplied to themotor.DC link voltage [V]DC link voltage [V]DC link voltage [V]DC link voltage [V]DC link voltage [V] states the intermediate circuitvoltage in the VLT AFD.Thermal load, motor [%]Thermal load, motor [%]Thermal load, motor [%]Thermal load, motor [%]Thermal load, motor [%] states the calculated/estimated thermal load on the motor. 100% is thecut-out limit. See also parameter 117 Motor thermalprotection.Thermal load, VLThermal load, VLThermal load, VLThermal load, VLThermal load, VLT [%]T [%]T [%]T [%]T [%] states the calculated/estimated thermal load on the VLT AFD. 100% isthe cut-out limit.Digital input [BinarDigital input [BinarDigital input [BinarDigital input [BinarDigital input [Binary code]y code]y code]y code]y code] states the signal statusfrom the 8 digital inputs (16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32and 33). Terminal 16 corresponds to the bit at the farleft. ‘0’ = no signal, ‘1’ = connected signal.Analog input 53 [V] Analog input 53 [V] Analog input 53 [V] Analog input 53 [V] Analog input 53 [V] states the voltage value on termi-nal 53.Analog input 54 [V] Analog input 54 [V] Analog input 54 [V] Analog input 54 [V] Analog input 54 [V] states the voltage value on termi-nal 54.Analog input 60 [mA]Analog input 60 [mA]Analog input 60 [mA]Analog input 60 [mA]Analog input 60 [mA] states the voltage value on ter-minal 60.

Feedback 1 (FEEDBACK 1 [UNITS]) [13]Feedback 2 (FEEDBACK 2 [UNITS]) [14]Feedback [unit] (FEEDBACK [UNITS]) [15]Motor voltage [V] (MOTOR VOLTAGE [V]) [16]DC link voltage [V] (DC VOLTAGE [V]) [17]Thermal load, motor [%](THERM.MOTOR LOAD [%]) [18]Thermal load, VLT [%](THERM.DRIVE LOAD [%]) [19]Digital input [Binary code](DIGITAL INPUT [BIN]) [20]Analog input 53 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 53 [V]) [21]Analog input 54 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 54 [V]) [22]Analog input 60 [mA](ANALOG INPUT 53 [mA]) [23]Pulse reference [Hz] (PULSE REFERENCE [HZ]) [24]External reference [%] (EXT. REFERENCE [%]) [25]Heat sink temp. [°C] (HEATSINK TEMP [°C]) [26]LCP Display text (FREE PROG.ARRAY) [27]

Function:This parameter allows a choice of the data value tobe shown in the display, line 2, when the VLT AFD isturned on. The data values will also be included inthe display mode scroll-list.Parameters 008-010 Small display readout allow achoice of another three data values, shown in line 1.See the description of the control unit.

Description of choice:

No readoutNo readoutNo readoutNo readoutNo readout can only be selected in parameters 008-010 Small display readout.Resulting reference [%]Resulting reference [%]Resulting reference [%]Resulting reference [%]Resulting reference [%] gives a percentage for theresulting reference in the range from Minimumreference, RefMIN to Maximum reference, RefMAX. Seealso reference handling.Reference [unitReference [unitReference [unitReference [unitReference [unit] gives the resulting reference in Hz inOpen loop. In Closed loop, the reference unit isselected in parameter 415 Process units.Frequency [Hz]Frequency [Hz]Frequency [Hz]Frequency [Hz]Frequency [Hz] gives the output frequency from theVLT AFD.% of maximum output frequency [%]% of maximum output frequency [%]% of maximum output frequency [%]% of maximum output frequency [%]% of maximum output frequency [%] is the presentoutput frequency as a percentage value of parameter202 Output frequency high limit, fMAX.Motor current [A]Motor current [A]Motor current [A]Motor current [A]Motor current [A] states the phase current of themotor measured as effective value.Power [HP]Power [HP]Power [HP]Power [HP]Power [HP] states the actual power consumed by themotor in HP.Power [HP]Power [HP]Power [HP]Power [HP]Power [HP] states the actual power consumed bythe motor in HP.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Pulse reference [Hz]Pulse reference [Hz]Pulse reference [Hz]Pulse reference [Hz]Pulse reference [Hz] states a pulse frequency in Hzconnected to terminal 17 or terminal 29.External reference [%]External reference [%]External reference [%]External reference [%]External reference [%] gives the sum of the externalreferences as a percentage (the sum of analog/pulse/serial communication) in the range from Minimumreference, RefMIN to Maximum reference, RefMAX.Heat sink temp. [°C]Heat sink temp. [°C]Heat sink temp. [°C]Heat sink temp. [°C]Heat sink temp. [°C] states the present heat sinktemperature of the VLT AFD. The cut-out limit is 90± 5°C; cutting back in occurs at 60 ± 5°C.LCD display textLCD display textLCD display textLCD display textLCD display text shows the text programmed inparameter 533 Display text 1 and 534 Display text 2via the serial communication port.

008 Small display readout 1.1(SMALL READOUT 1)

Value:See parameter 007 Large display readout

Reference [Unit] [2]

Function:This parameter enables a choice of the first of threedata values to be shown on the display, line 1,position 1.This is a useful function, when setting the PID regu-lator to see how the process reacts to a change ofreference.For display read-outs, press the [DISPLAY/STATUS]button. Data option LCP display text [27] cannot beselected with small display readout.

Description of choice:There is a choice of 26 different data values, seeparameter 007 Large display readout.


Value:See parameter 007 Large display readout

Motorcurrent [A] [5]

Function:

See the functional description for parameter 008Small display readout.

Description of choice:There is a choice of 26 different data values, see pa-rameter 007 Large display readout.


Value:Se parameter 007 Large display readout

Power [HP] [6]

Function:See the functional description for parameter 008 Smalldata readout.

Description of choice:There is a choice of 26 different data values, see parame-ter 007 Large display readout.

011 Unit of local reference(UNIT OF LOC REF)

Value:Hz (HZ) [0]

% of output frequency range (%) (% OF FMAX) [1]

Function:This parameter decides the local reference unit.

Description of choice:Choose the required unit for local reference.

012 Hand start on LCP(HAND START BTTN)

Value:Disable (DISABLE) [0]

Enable (ENABLE) [1]

Function:This parameter allows selection/deselection of the Handstart key on the control panel.

Description of choice:If Disable [0] is selected in this parameter, the [HANDSTART] key will be inactive.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


013 OFF/STOP on LCP (STOP BUTTON)Value:

Disable (DISABLE) [0] Enable (ENABLE) [1]

Function:This parameter allows selection/deselection of the localstop key on the control panel.

Description of choice:If Disable [0] is selected in this parameter, the [OFF/STOP] key will be inactive.

NOTE:If Disable is selected, the motor cannot bestopped by means of the [OFF/STOP] key.

014 Auto start on LCP (AUTO START BTTN)Value


Function:This parameter allows selection/deselection of the autostart key on the control panel.

Description of choice:If Disable [0] is selected in this parameter, the [AUTOSTART] key will be inactive.

015 Reset on LCP (RESET BUTTON)Value:


Function:This parameter allows selection/deselection of the resetkey on the control panel.

Description of choice:If Disable [0] is selected in this parameter, the [RESET]key will be inactive.

NOTE:

016 Lock for data change(DATA CHANGE LOCK)

Value: Not locked (NOT LOCKED) [0]

Locked (LOCKED) [1]

Function:This parameter allows the control panel to be‘locked’, which means that it is not possible to carryout data modifications via the control unit.

Description of choice:If Locked [1] is selected, data modifications in theparameters cannot be made, although it will still bepossible to carry out data modifications via the bus.Parameters 007-010 Display readout can be changedvia the control panel.It is also possible to lock for data modifications inthese parameters by means of a digital input, seeparameters 300-307 Digital inputs.

017 Operating state at power up, localcontrol (POWER UP ACTION)

Value:

Auto restart (AUTO RESTART) [0]OFF/Stop (OFF/STOP) [1]

Function:

Setting of the desired operating mode when the linevoltage is reconnected.

Description of choice:Auto restart [0] is selected if the VLT AFD is to startup in the same start/stop condition as immediatelybefore power to the converter is cut off.OFF/Stop [1] is selected if the VLT AFD is to remainstopped when the line voltage is connected, until astart command is active. To restart, activate the key[HAND START] or [AUTO START] by using the controlpanel.

NOTE:If [HAND START] or [AUTO START] cannot beactivated by the keys on the control panel (see

parameter 012/014 Hand/Auto start on LCP) the mo-tor will not be able to restart if OFF/Stop [1] isselected.If Handstart or Autostart has been programmed foractivation via the digital inputs, the motor will not beable to restart if OFF/Stop [1] is selected.

Only select Disable [0] if an externalreset signal has been connected via thedigital inputs.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Load and Motor 100-117This parameter group allows the configuration ofregulation parameters and the choice of torquecharacteristics to which the VLT AFD is to beadapted.The motor nameplate data must be set andautomatic motor adaptation can be carried out. Inaddition, DC brake parameters can be set and themotor thermal protection can be activated.

ConfigurationThe selection of configuration and torque characteris-tics influences the parameters that can be seen in thedisplay. If Open loop [0] is selected, all parametersrelating to PID regulation will be hidden.Consequently, the user is only able to see the para-meters that are of significance for a given application.

100 Configuration (CONFIG. MODE)Value:

Open loop (OPEN LOOP) [0]Closed loop (CLOSED LOOP) [1]

Function:This parameter is used for selecting the configurationto which the VLT AFD is to be adapted.

Description of choice:If Open loop [0] is selected, normal speed control isobtained (without feedback signal), i.e. if the referenceis changed, the motor speed will change.If Closed loop [1] is selected, the internal processregulator is activated to enable accurate regulation inrelation to a given process signal.The reference (setpoint) and the process signal (feed-back) can be set to a process unit as programmed inparameter 415 Process units.See Feedback handling.

101 Torque characteristics( VT CHARACT)

Value: Automatic Energy Optimization

(AEO FUNCTION) [0]Parallel motors (MULTIPLE MOTORS) [1]

Function:This parameter allows a choice of whether the VLT AFDhas one or several motors connected to it.

Description of choice:If Automatic Energy Optimization [0] has been selected,only one motor may be connected to the VLT AFD. TheAEO function ensures that the motor obtains its maximumefficiency and minimizes motor interference.Select Parallel motors [1] if more than one motor isconnected to the output in parallel. See the description un-der parameter 108 Start voltage of parallel motorsregarding the setting of parallel motor start voltages.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


NOTE:It is important that the values set in parameters102-106 Nameplate data correspond to the

nameplate data of the motor with respect to eitherstar coupling Y or delta coupling ∆.

102 Motor power, PM,N (MOTOR POWER)Value:

0.25 HP (0.25 KW) [25]0.5 HP (0.37 KW) [37]0.75 HP (0.55 KW) [55]1 HP (0.75 KW) [75]1.5 HP (1.10 KW) [110]2 HP (1.50 KW) [150]3 HP (2.20 KW) [220]4 HP (3.00 KW) [300]5 HP (4.00 KW) [400]7.5 HP (5.50 KW) [550]10 HP (7.50 KW) [750]15 HP (11.00 KW) [1100]20 HP (15.00 KW) [1500]25 HP (18.50 KW) [1850]30 HP (22.00 KW) [2200]40 HP (30.00 KW) [3000]50 HP (37.00 KW) [3700]60 HP (45.00 KW) [4500]75 HP (55.00 KW) [5500]100 HP (75.00 KW) [7500]125 HP (90.00 KW) [9000]150 HP (110.00 KW) [11000]200 HP (132.00 KW) [13200]250 HP (160.00 KW) [16000]300 HP (200.00 KW) [20000]350 HP (250.00 KW) [25000]400 HP (300.00 KW) [30000]450 HP (315.00 KW) [31500]500 HP (355.00 KW) [35500]600 HP (400.00 KW) [40000]

Depends on the unit

Function:This is where to select the kW value PM,N thatcorresponds to the rated power of the motor.At the works, a rated kW value PM,N has been selectedthat depends on the type of unit.

Description of choice:Select a value that equals the nameplate data on themotor. There are 4 possible undersizes or 1 oversizein comparison with the factory setting.

Also, alternatively it is possible to set the value of themotor power infinitely variable value, see theprocedure fro infinetely variable change of numericdata value.

103 Motor voltage, UM,N

(MOTOR VOLTAGE)Value:

200 V [200]208 V [208]220 V [220]230 V [230]240 V [240]380 V [380]400 V [400]415 V [415]440 V [440]460 V [460]480 V [480]500 V [500]

Depends on the unit

Function:This is where the rated motor voltage UM,N is set foreither star Y or delta ∆.

Description of choice:Select a value that equals the nameplate data on themotor, regardless of the line voltage of the VLT AFD.Furthermore, alternatively it is possible to set thevalue of the motor voltage infinitely variably. Alsorefer to the procedure for infinitely variable change ofnumeric data value.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

104 Motor frequency, fM,N

(MOTOR FREQUENCY)Value:

50 Hz (50 Hz) [50] 60 Hz (60 Hz) [60]

Function:Select the rated motor frequency fM,N.

Description of choice:Select a value that equals the nameplate data on themotor.It is also possible to set the value for motor frequencyinfinitely variable in the 24-1000 Hz range.

105 Motor current, IM,N (MOTOR CURRENT)Value:

0.01 - IVLT,MAX A Depends on the choice of motor.

Function:

The rated motor current IM,N forms part of the VLTAFD calculations of torque and motor thermalprotection. Set the motor current IVLT,N, taking intoaccount the star Y or delta ∆ connected motor.

Description of choice:Set a value that equals the nameplate data on themotor.

NOTE:It is important to enter the correct value, sincethis forms part of the V V CPLUS control feature.

106 Rated motor speed, nM,N

(MOTOR NOM. SPEED)Value:

100 - fM,N x 60 (max. 60000 rpm) Depends on parameter 102 Motor power, PM,N.

Function:This sets the value that corresponds to the rated motorspeed nM,N, from the nameplate data.

Description of choice:Choose a value that corresponds to the motor nameplatedata.

NOTE:It is important to set the correct value, since thisforms part of the V V CPLUS control feature. The

max. value equals fM,N x 60.fM,N is set in parameter 104 Motor frequency, fM,N.

107 Automatic motor adaptation, AMA(AUTO MOTOR ADAPT)

Value: Optimisation disable (NO AMA) [0]

Automatic adaptation (RUN AMA) [1]Automatic adaptation with LC-filter(RUN AMA WITH LC-FILT) [2]

Function:Automatic motor adaptation is a test algorithm thatmeasures the electrical motor parameters at motorstandstill. This means that AMA itself does not supply anytorque.AMA is useful when commissioning systems, where theuser wants to optimise the adjustment of the VLT AFD tothe motor applied. This feature is used where the factorysetting does not match requirements of the motor.

For the best adjustment of the VLT AFD, it isrecommended to carry out AMA on a cold motor.It must be noted that repeated AMA runs may lead to aheating of the motor that will result in an increase of thestator resistance RS. However, this is not normally critical.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


It is possible via parameter 107 Automatic motoradaptation, AMA to choose whether a completeautomatic motor adaptation Automatic adaptation [1]is to be carried out, or whether reduced automaticmotor adaptation Automatic adaptation with LC-filter[2] is to be made.It is only possible to carry out the reduced test if aLC-filter has been placed between the VLT AFD andthe motor. If a total setting is required, the LC-filtercan be removed and, after completion of the AMA, itcan be reinstalled. In Automatic optimisation with LC-filter [2] there is no test of motor symmetry and ofwhether all motor phases have been connected. Thefollowing must be noted when the AMA function isused:- For AMA to be able to determine the motor

parameters optimally, the correct nameplatedata for the motor connected to the VLT AFDmust be entered in parameters 102 to 106.

- The duration of a total automatic motor adaptationvaries from a few minutes to approx. 10 minutesfor small motors, depending on the rating of themotor used (the time for a 7.5 HP motor, forexample, is approx. 4 minutes).

- Alarms and warnings will be shown in the displayif faults occur during motor adaptation.

- AMA can only be carried out if the rated motorcurrent of the motor is min. 35% of the rated out-put current of the VLT AFD.

- If automatic motor adaptation is to bediscontinued, press the [OFF/STOP] key.

NOTE:AMA is not allowed on motors connected inparallel.

Description of choice:Select Automatic adaptation [1] if the VLT AFD is tocarry out a complete automatic motor adaptation.Select Automatic adaptation with LC-filter [2] if a LC-filter has been placed between the VLT AFD and themotor.

Procedure for automatic motor adaptation:1. Set the motor parameters in accordance with

the motor nameplate data given in parameters102-106 Nameplate data.

2. Connect 24 V DC (possibly from terminal 12) toterminal 27 on the control card.

3. Select Automatic adaptation [1] or Automaticadaptation with LC-filter [2] in parameter 107Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.

4. Start up the VLT AFD or connect terminal 18(start) to 24 V DC (possibly from terminal 12).

If the automatic motor adaptation is to bestopped:1. Press the [OFF/STOP] key.

After a normal sequence, the display reads:AMA STOP1. The VLT AFD is now ready for operation.

If there is a fault, the display reads:ALARM 221. Press the [Reset] key.2. Check for possible causes of the fault in accor-

dance with the alarm message. See list ofwarnings and alarms.

If there is a warning, the display reads:WARNING 39-421. Check for possible causes of the fault in

accordance with the warning. See list of warningsand alarms.

2. Press the [CHANGE DATA] key and select"Continue" if AMA is to continue despite thewarning, or press the [OFF/STOP] key to stop theautomatic motor adaptation.

108 Start voltage of parallel motors(MULTIM.START VOLT)

Value:0.0 - parameter 103 Motor voltage, UM,N

depends on par. 103 Motor voltage, UM,N

Function:This parameter specifies the start-up voltage of thepermanent VT characteristics at 0 Hz for motorsconnected in parallel.The start-up voltage represents a supplementary volt-age input to the motor. By increasing the start-up volt-age, motors connected in parallel receive a higherstart-up torque. This is used especially for smallmotors (< 4.0 HP) connected in parallel, as they havea higher stator resistance than motors above 5.5 HP.This function is only active if Parallel motors [1] has beenselected in parameter 101 Torque characteristics.

Description of choice:Set the start-up voltage at 0 Hz. The maximum volt-age depends on parameter 103 Motor voltage, UM,N.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

109 Resonance damping(RESONANCE DAMP.)

Value:0 - 500 % 100 %

Function:High-frequency electric resonance problems betweenthe VLT AFD and the motor can be eliminated byadjusting the resonance damping.

Description of choice:Adjust the damping percentage until the motorresonance has disappeared.

110 High break-away torque(HIGH START TORQ.)

Value:

0.0 - 0.5 sec. 0.0 sec.

Function:In order to secure a high starting torque, themaximum torque for max. 0.5 sec. is allowed.However, the current is limited by the protection limitof the VLT AFD.0 sec. corresponds to no high break-away torque.

Description of choice:Set the necessary time in which a high starting torqueis desired.

111 Start delay (START DELAY)Value:

0.0 - 120.0 sec. 0.0 sec.

Function:This parameter enables a delay of the starting timeafter the conditions for start have been fulfilled. Whenthe time has passed, the output frequency will startby ramping up to the reference.

Description of choice:Set the desired time until acceleration is to begin.

112 Motor preheater (MOTOR PREHEAT)Value:

Disable (DISABLE) [0]Enable (ENABLE) [1]

Function:The motor preheater ensures that no condensatedevelops in the motor at stop. This function can also beused to evaporate condensed water in the motor. Themotor preheater is only active during stop.

Description of choice:Select Disable [0] if this function is not required. SelectEnable [1] to activate motor preheating. The DC current isset in parameter 113 Motor preheater DC current.

113 Motor preheater DC current(PREHEAT DC-CURR.)

Value:0 - 100 % 50 %

The maximum value depends on the rated motor current,parameter 105 Motor current, IM,N.

Function:The motor can be preheated at stop by means of a DCcurrent to prevent moisture from entering the motor.

Description of choice:The motor can be preheated by means of a DC current.At 0%, the function is inactive; at a value higher than 0%,a DC current will be supplied to the motor at stop (0 Hz).This function can also be used to generate a holdingtorque.

If too high a DC current is supplied for toolong, the motor can be damaged.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Make sure not to supply too high a brakingcurrent for too long.The motor will be damaged because of mechanical overload

or the heat generated in the motor.

115 DC braking time(DC BRAKE TIME)

Value:0.0 - 60.0 sec. OFF

Function:This parameter is for setting the DC braking time forwhich the DC braking current (parameter 113) is to beactive.

Description of choice:Set the desired time.

116 DC brake cut-in frequency(DC BRAKE CUT-IN)

Value:0.0 (OFF) - par. 202 Output frequencyhigh limit, fMAX OFF

Function:

This parameter is used for setting the DC brake cut-infrequency at which DC braking is to be activated inconnection with a stop command.

Description of choice:Set the desired frequency.

DC brakingIn DC braking, the motor receives a DC current thatbrings the shaft to a halt. Parameter 114 DC brakingcurrent, decides the DC braking current as a percent-age of the rated motor current IM,N.In parameter 115 DC braking time, the DC brakingtime is selected, and in parameter 116 DC brake cut-in frequency, the frequency is selected at which DCbraking becomes active.If terminal 19 or 27 (parameter 303/304 Digital input)has been programmed to DC braking inverse andshifts from logic ‘1’ to logic ‘0’, the DC braking will beactivated.When the start signal on terminal 18 changes fromlogic ‘1’ to logic ‘0’, the DC braking will be activatedwhen the output frequency becomes lower than thebrake coupling frequency.

NOTE:The DC brake is not to be used if the inertia ofthe motor shaft is more than 20 times the

inertia of the motor itself.

114 DC braking current(DC BRAKE CURRENT)

Value:

0 - 50 %

The maximum value depends on the rated motorcurrent. If the DC braking current is active, the VLT AFDhas a switching frequency of 4 kHz.

Function:This parameter is used for setting the DC brakingcurrent that is activated upon a stop when the DCbrake frequency set in parameter 116, DC brake cut-in frequency has been reached, or if DC brake inverseis active via terminal 27 or via the serialcommunication port. The DC braking current will beactive for the duration of the DC braking time set inparameter 115 DC braking time.

Description of choice:To be set as a percentage value of the rated motorcurrent IM,N set in parameter 105 Motor current, IVLT,N.100% DC braking current corresponds to IM,N.

IVLT,MAX

IM,Nx 100 [%]


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

117 Motor thermal protection(MOT. THERM PROTEC)

Value:No protection (NO PROTECTION) [0]Thermistor warning (THERMISTOR WARNING) [1]Thermistor trip (THERMISTOR FAULT) [2]ETR Warning 1 (ETR WARNING 1) [3]

ETR Trip 1 (ETR TRIP 1) [4]ETR Warning 2 (ETR WARNING 2) [5]ETR Trip 2 (ETR TRIP 2) [6]ETR Warning 3 (ETR WARNING 3) [7]ETR Trip 3 (ETR TRIP 3) [8]ETR Warning 4 (ETR WARNING 4) [9]ETR Trip 4 (ETR TRIP 4) [10]

Function:The VLT AFD is able to monitor the motor tempera-ture in two different ways:- Via a thermistor sensor fitted to the motor. The

thermistor is connected to one of the analog inputterminals 53 and 54.

- Calculation of the thermal load (ETR - ElectronicThermal Relay), based on the current load and thetime. This is compared with the rated motorcurrent IM,N and the rated motor frequency fM,N.The calculations made take into account the needfor a lower load at lower speeds because of lesscooling in the motor itself.

ETR functions 1-4 do not start calculating the loaduntil there is a switch-over to the Setup in which theywere selected. This enables the use of the ETRfunction, even where two or several motors alternate.

Description of choice:Select No protection [0] if no warning or tripping isrequired when the motor is overloaded.Select Thermistor warning [1] if a warning is desiredwhen the connected thermistor gets too hot.Select Thermistor trip [2] if cutting out (trip) is desiredwhen the connected thermistor overheats.Select ETR Warning 1-4, if a warning is to come upon the display when the motor is overloadedaccording to the calculations.The VLT AFD can also be programmed to give off awarning signal via one of the digital outputs.Select ETR Trip 1-4 if tripping is desired when the mo-tor is overloaded according to the calculations.

NOTE:In UL / cUL applications ETR provides class 20motor overload profection in accordance withNational Electrical Code.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


References & Limits 200 - 228

In this parameter group, the frequency and referencerange of the VLT AFD are established.This parameter group also includes:- Setting of ramp times- Choice of four preset references- Possibility of programming four bypass

frequencies.- Setting of maximum current to motor.- Setting of warning limits for current, frequency,

reference and feedback.

200 Output frequency range(FREQUENCY RANGE)

Value:

0 - 120 Hz (0 - 120 HZ) [0]0 - 1000 Hz (0 - 1000 HZ) [1]

Function:

This is where to select the maximum outputfrequency range to be set in parameter 202 Outputfrequency high limit, fMAX.

Description of choice:Select the required output frequency range.

201 Output frequency low limit, fMIN

(MIN. FREQUENCY)Value:

0.0 - fMAX 0.0 HZ

Function:This is where to select the minimum output frequency.

Description of choice:A value from 0.0 Hz to the Output frequency highlimit, fMAX frequency set in parameter 202 can beselected.

202 Output frequency high limit, fMAX

(MAX. FREQUENCY)Value:

fMIN - 120/1000 Hz(par. 200 Output frequency range) 60 Hz

Function:In this parameter, a maximum output frequency canbe selected that corresponds to the highest speed atwhich the motor can be.

NOTE:The output frequency of the VLT AFD cannever assume a value higher than 1/10 of the

switching frequency (parameter 407 Switchingfrequency).

Description of choice:A value from fMIN to the choice made in parameter 200Output frequency range can be selected.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Reference handlingReference handling is shown in the block diagramunderneath.The block diagram shows how a change in aparameter can affect the resulting reference.

Parameters 203 to 205 Reference handling, minimumand maximum reference and parameter 210Reference type define the way reference handling canbe carried out. The mentioned parameters are activeboth in a closed and in an open loop.

Remote references are defined as:• External references, such as analog inputs 53, 54

and 60, pulse reference via terminal 17/29 andreference from serial communication.

• Preset references.

The resulting reference can be shown in the displayby selecting Reference [%] in parameters 007-010Display readout and in the form of a unit by selectingResulting reference [unit].See the section on Feedback handling in connectionwith a closed loop.

The sum of the external references can be shown in thedisplay as a percentage of the range from Minimum refe-rence, RefMIN to Maximum reference, RefMAX. SelectExternal reference, % [25] in parameters 007-010 Displayreadout if a readout is required.

It is possible to have both preset references and externalreferences at the same time. In parameter 210 Referencetype a choice is made of how the preset references are tobe added to the external references.

Furthermore, an independent local reference exists, wherethe resulting reference is set by means of the [+/-] keys. Iflocal reference has been selected, the output frequencyrange is limited by parameter 201 Output frequency lowlimit, fMIN and parameter 202 Output frequency high limit,fMAX.

NOTE:If the local reference is active, the VLT AFD willalways be in Open loop [0], regardless of the choicemade in parameter 100 Configuration.

The unit of the local reference can be set either as Hz oras a percentage of the output frequency range. The unit isselected in parameter 011 Unit of local reference.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


203 Reference site(REFERENCE SITE)

Value:

Hand/Auto linked reference(LINKED TO HAND/AUTO)) [0]Remote reference (REMOTE) [1]Local reference (LOCAL) [2]

Function:This parameter determines the location of the activereference. If Hand/Auto linked reference [0] isselected, the resulting reference will depend onwhether the VLT AFD is in Hand or Auto mode.The table shows which references are active whenHand/Auto linked reference [0], Remote reference [1]or Local reference [2] has been selected. The Handmode or Auto mode can be selected via the controlkeys or via a digital input, parameters 300-307Digital inputs.

Reference

handling Hand mode Auto mode

Hand/Auto [0] Local ref. active Remote ref. active

Remote [1] Remote ref. active Remote ref. active

Local [2] Local ref. active Local ref. active

Description of choice:If Hand/Auto linked reference [0] is chosen, the motorspeed in Hand mode will be decided by the localreference, while in Auto mode it depends on remotereferences and any setpoints selected.If Remote reference [1] is selected, the motor speedwill depend on remote references, regardless ofwhether Hand mode or Auto mode has beenchosen.If Local reference [2] is selected, the motor speed willonly depend on the local reference set via the controlpanel, regardless of whether Hand mode or Automode has been selected.

204 Minimum reference, RefMIN

(MIN. REFERENCE)Value:

Parameter 100 Configuration = Open loop [0].0.000 - parameter 205 RefMAX 0.000 Hz

Parameter 100 Configuration = Closed loop [1].-Par. 413 Minimum feedback- par. 205 RefMAX 0.000

Function:The Minimum reference gives the minimum value thatcan be assumed by the sum of all references. If Closedloop has been selected in parameter 100Configuration, the minimum reference is limited byparameter 413 Minimum feedback.Minimum reference is ignored when the local referenceis active (parameter 203 Reference site).The unit for the reference can be seen from thefollowing table:

Unit

Par. 100 Configuration = Open loop Hz

Par. 100 Configuration = Closed loop Par. 415

Description of choice:Minimum reference is set if the motor is to run at aminimum speed, regardless of whether the resultingreference is 0.

205 Maximum reference, RefMAX

(MAX. REFERENCE)Value:

Parameter 100 Configuration = Open loop [0]Parameter 204 RefMIN - 1000.000 Hz 60 Hz

Parameter 100 Configuration = Closed loop [1]Par. 204 RefMIN

- par. 414 Maximum feedback 60 Hz

Function:The Maximum reference gives the maximum valuethat can be assumed by the sum of all references. IfClosed loop [1] has been selected in parameter 100Configuration, the maximum reference cannot be setabove parameter 414 Maximum feedback. TheMaximum reference is ignored when the localreference is active (parameter 203 Reference site).


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Function, cont.:The reference unit can be determined on the basis ofthe following table:

Unit

Par. 100 Configuration = Open loop Hz

Par. 100 Configuration = Closed loop Par. 415

Description of choice:Maximum reference is set if the motor speed is not toexceed the set value, regardless of whether theresulting reference is higher than Maximum reference.

206 Ramp-up time (RAMP UP TIME)Value:

1 - 3600 sec. Depends on the unit

Function:The ramp-up time is the acceleration time from 0 Hzto the rated motor frequency fM,N (parameter 104Motor frequency, fM,N). It is assumed that the outputcurrent does not reach the current limit (set inparameter 215 Current limit ILIM).

Description of choice:Program the desired ramp-up time.

207 Ramp-down time (RAMP DOWN TIME)Value:

1 - 3600 sec. Depends on the unit

Function:The ramp-down time is the deceleration time from therated motor frequency fM,N (parameter 104 Motorfrequency, fM,N) to 0 Hz, provided there is noovervoltage in the inverter because of the motoracting as a generator.

Description of choice:Program the desired ramp-down time.

208 Automatic ramp-down(AUTO RAMPING)

Value:Disable (DISABLE) [0]

Enable (ENABLE) [1]

Function:This function ensures that the VLT AFD does not tripduring deceleration if the ramp-down time set is tooshort. If, during deceleration, the VLT AFD registers thatthe intermediate circuit voltage is higher than the max.value (see list of warnings and alarms), the VLT AFDautomatically extends the ramp-down time.

NOTE:If the function is chosen as Enable [1], the ramptime may be considerably extended in relation to

the time set in parameter 207 Ramp-down time.

Description of choice:Program this function as Enable [1] if the VLT AFDperiodically trips during ramp-down. If a quick ramp-down time has been programmed that may lead to a tripunder special conditions, the function can be set toEnable [1] to avoid trips.

209 Jog frequency (JOG FREQUENCY)Value:

Par. 201 Output frequency Low limit - par. 202Output frequency high limit 10.0 HZ

Function:The jog frequency fJOG is the fixed output frequency atwhich the VLT AFD is running when the jog function isactivated.Jog can be activated via the digital inputs.

Description of choice:Set the desired frequency.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


210 Reference type(REF. FUNCTION)

Value: Sum (SUM) [0]

Relative (RELATIVE) [1]External/preset (EXTERNAL/PRESET) [2]

Function:

It is possible to define how the preset references areto be added to the other references. For this purpose,Sum or Relative is used. It is also possible - by usingthe External/preset function - to select whether a shiftbetween external references and preset references iswanted.See Reference handling.

Description of choice:If Sum [0] is selected, one of the adjusted presetreferences (parameters 211-214 Preset reference) isadded to the other external references as apercentage of the reference range (RefMIN-RefMAX).If Relative [1] is selected, one of the adjusted presetreferences (parameters 211-214 Preset reference) istotaled as a percentage of the sum of the presentexternal references.If External/preset [2] is selected, it is possible to shiftbetween external references and preset referencesvia terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33 (parameter 300, 301,305, 306 or 307 Digital inputs). Preset references willbe a percentage value of the reference range.External reference is the sum of the analogreferences, pulse references and any references fromserial communication.

NOTE:If Sum or Relative is selected, one of thepreset references will always be active. If the

preset references are to be without influence, theyshould be set to 0% (as in the factory setting) via theserial communication port.

Reference typeThe example shows how the resulting reference iscalculated when Preset references are used togetherwith Sum and Relative in parameter 210 Referencetype. See Calculation of resulting reference.See also the drawing in Reference handling.

The following parameters have been set:Par. 204 Minimum reference: 10 HzPar. 205 Maximum reference: 50 HzPar. 211 Preset reference: 15%Par. 308 Terminal 53, analog input: Reference [1]Par. 309 Terminal 53, min. scaling: 0 VPar. 310 Terminal 53, max. scaling: 10 V

When parameter 210 Reference type is set to Sum[0], one of the adjusted Preset references (par. 211-214) will be added to the external references as apercentage of the reference range. If terminal 53 isenergized by an analog input voltage of 4 V, theresulting reference will be as follows:

Par. 210 Reference type = Sum [0]Par. 204 Minimum reference = 10.0 HzReference contribution at 4 V = 16.0 HzPar. 211 Preset reference = 6.0 HzResulting reference = 32.0 Hz

If parameter 210 Reference type is set to Relative [1],one of the adjusted Preset references (par. 211-214)will be totaled as a percentage of the sum of thepresent external references. If terminal 53 is energizedby an analog input voltage of 4 V, the resultingreference will be as follows:

Par. 210 Reference type = Relative [1]Par. 204 Minimum reference = 10.0 HzReference contribution at 4 V = 16.0 HzPar. 211 Preset reference = 2.4 HzResulting reference = 28.4 Hz

The graph in the next column shows the resultingreference in relation to the external reference variedfrom 0-10 V.Parameter 210 Reference type has been pro-grammed for Sum [0] and Relative [1], respectively. Inaddition, a graph is shown in which parameter 211Preset reference 1 is programmed for 0%.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

211 Preset reference 1 (PRESET REF. 1)212 Preset reference 2 (PRESET REF. 2)213 Preset reference 3 (PRESET REF. 3)214 Preset reference 4 (PRESET REF. 4)Value:

-100.00 % - +100.00 % 0.00%of the reference range/external reference

Function:Four different preset references can be programmedin parameters 211-214 Preset reference. The presetreference is stated as a percentage value of thereference range (RefMIN - RefMAX) or as a percentage ofthe other external references, depending on thechoice made in parameter 210 Reference type.The choice between the preset references can bemade by activating terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33, cf.the table below.

Terminal 17/29/33 Terminal 16/29/32preset ref. msb preset ref. lsb

0 0 Preset ref. 10 1 Preset ref. 21 0 Preset ref. 31 1 Preset ref. 4

Description of choice:Set the required preset reference(s) that is/are to bethe options.

215 Current limit, ILIM

(CURRENT LIMIT)Value:

0.1 - 1.1 x IVLT,N 1.0 x IVLT,N [A]

Function:

This is where the maximum output current ILIM is set.The factory setting corresponds to the rated outputcurrent. If the current limit is to be used as motorprotection, the rated motor current must be set. If thecurrent limit is set within the range of 1.0-1.1 x IVLT,N

(the rated output current of the VLT AFD), the VLTAFD can only handle a load intermittently, i.e. for shortperiods at a time. After the load has been higher thanIVLT,N, it must be ensured that for a period the load islower than IVLT,N.Please note that if the current limit is set to less thanIVLT,N, the acceleration torque will be reducedcorrespondingly.

Description of choice:Set the required maximum output current ILIM.

216 Frequency bypass, bandwidth(FREQUENCY BYPASS B.W.)

Value:0 (OFF) - 100 Hz Disable

Function:Some systems call for some output frequencies to beavoided because of mechanical resonance problems inthe system.These output frequencies can be programmed inparameters 217-220 Frequency bypass.In this parameter (216 Frequency bypass, bandwidth), adefinition can be given of a bandwidth around each ofthese frequencies.

Description of choice:The bypass bandwidth is equal to the programmedbandwidth frequency. This bandwidth will be centeredaround each bypass frequency.

217 Frequency bypass 1(BYPASS FREQ. 1)




Value:0 - 120/1000 HZ 120.0 HzThe frequency range depends on the selection made inparameter 200 Output frequency range.

Function:Some systems call for some output frequencies to beavoided because of mechanical resonance problems inthe system.

Description of choice:Enter the frequencies to be avoided.See also parameter 216 Frequency bypass, bandwidth.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


222 Warning: High current, IHIGH

(WARN. HIGH CURR.)Value:

Parameter 221 - IVLT,MAX IVLT,MAX

Function:If the motor current is above the limit, IHIGH, pro-grammed in this parameter, the display shows aflashing CURRENT HIGH.The warning functions in parameters 221-228 arenot active during ramp-up after a start command,ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. The warning functions are activated when theoutput frequency has reached the resultingreference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.

Description of choice:The upper signal limit of the motor frequency, fHIGH,must be programmed within the normal workingrange of the AFD. See drawing at parameter 221Warning: Low current, ILOW.

223 Warning: Low frequency, fLOW

(WARN. LOW FREQ.)Value:

0.0 - parameter 224 0.0 Hz

Function:If the output frequency is below the limit, fLOW,programmed in this parameter, the display will show aflashing FREQUENCY LOW.The warning functions in parameters 221-228 arenot active during ramp-up after a start command,ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. The warning functions are activated when theoutput frequency has reached the selected refe-rence.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.

Description of choice:The lower signal limit of the motor frequency, fLOW,must be programmed within the normal workingrange of the AFD. See drawing at parameter 221Warning: Low current, ILOW.

221 Warning: Low current, ILOW

(WARN. LOW CURR.)Value:

0.0 - par. 222 Warning: High current, IHIGH 0.0A

Function:When the motor current is below the limit, ILOW,programmed in this parameter, the display shows aflashing CURRENT LOW, provided Warning [1] has beenselected in parameter 409 Function in case of no load.The VLT AFD will trip if parameter 409 Function in caseof no load has been selected as Trip [0].The warning functions in parameters 221-228 are notactive during ramp-up after a start command, ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. Thewarning functions are activated when the outputfrequency has reached the resulting reference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.

Description of choice:The lower signal limit ILOW must be programmed withinthe normal working range of the AFD.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

224 Warning: High frequency, fHIGH

(WARN. HIGH FREQ.)Value:

Par. 200 Output frequency range = 0-120 Hz [0].parameter 223 - 120 Hz 120.0 Hz

Par. 200 Output frequency range = 0-1000 Hz [1].parameter 223 - 1000 Hz 120.0 Hz

Function:If the output frequency is above the limit, fHIGH,programmed in this parameter, the display will show aflashing FREQUENCY HIGH.The warning functions in parameters 221-228 arenot active during ramp-up after a start command,ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. The warning functions are activated when theoutput frequency has reached the selected reference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.

Description of choice:The higher signal limit of the motor frequency, fHIGH,must be programmed within the normal workingrange of the AFD. See drawing at parameter 221Warning: Low current, ILOW.

225 Warning: Low reference, REFLOW

(WARN. LOW REF.)Value:

-999,999.999 - REFHIGH (par.226) -999,999.999

Function:When the remote reference lies under the limit,RefLOW, programmed in this parameter, the displayshows a flashing REFERENCE LOW.

The warning functions in parameters 221-228 are notactive during ramp-up after a start command, ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. Thewarning functions are activated when the outputfrequency has reached the selected reference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.

The reference limits in parameter 226 Warning: Highreference, RefHIGH, and in parameter 227 Warning: Lowreference, RefLOW, are only active when remote referencehas been selected.In Open loop mode the unit for the reference is Hz, whilein Closed loop mode the unit is programmed in parameter415 Process units.

Description of choice:The lower signal limit, RefLOW, of the reference must beprogrammed within the normal working range of the AFD,provided parameter 100 Configuration has been program-med for Open loop [0]. In Closed loop [1] (parameter 100),RefLOW must be within the reference range programmed inparameters 204 and 205.

226 Warning: High reference, REFHIGH

(WARN. HIGH REF.)Value:

REFLow (par. 225) - 999,999.999 - 999,999.999

Function:If the resulting reference lies under the limit, RefHIGH,programmed in this parameter, the display shows aflashing REFERENCE HIGH.The warning functions in parameters 221-228 are notactive during ramp-up after a start command, ramp-downafter a stop command or while stop-ped. The warningfunctions are activated when the output frequency hasreached the selected reference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.The reference limits in parameter 226 Warning: Highreference, RefHIGH, and in parameter 227 Warning: Lowreference, RefLOW, are only active when remote referencehas been selected.In Open loop the unit for the reference is Hz, while inClosed loop the unit is programmed in parameter 415Process units.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Description of choice:The upper signal limit, RefHIGH,of the reference mustbe programmed within the normal working range ofthe AFD, provided parameter 100 Configuration hasbeen programmed for Open loop [0]. In Closed loop[1] (parameter 100), RefHIGH must be within the refe-rence range programmed in parameters 204 and205.

227 Warning: Low feedback, FBLOW

(WARN LOW FDBK)Value:

-999,999.999 - FBHIGH (parameter 228) -999.999,999

Function:If the feedback signal is below the limit, FBLOW,

programmed in this parameter, the display will show aflashing FEEDBACK LOW.The warning functions in parameters 221-228 are notactive during ramp-up after a start command, ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. Thewarning functions are activated when the outputfrequency has reached the selected reference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.In Closed loop, the unit for the feedback isprogrammed in parameter 415 Process units.

Description of choice:Set the required value within the feedback range(parameter 413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN, and 414Maximum feedback, FBMAX).

228 Warning: High feedback, FBHIGH

(WARN. HIGH FDBK)Value:

FBLOW (parameter 227) - 999,999.999 999.999,999

Function:If the feedback signal is above the limit, FBHIGH,programmed in this parameter, the display will show aflashing FEEDBACK HIGH.The warning functions in parameters 221-228 are notactive during ramp-up after a start command, ramp-down after a stop command or while stop-ped. Thewarning functions are activated when the outputfrequency has reached the selected reference.The signal outputs can be programmed to generate awarning signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via the relayoutputs.In Closed loop, the unit for the feedback isprogrammed in parameter 415 Process units.

Description of choice:Set the required value within the feedback range(parameter 413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN, and 414Maximum feedback, FBMAX).


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Inputs and outputs 300-328In this parameter group, thefunctions that relate to the input andoutput terminals of the VLT AFDare defined. The digital inputs

(terminals 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33) areprogrammed in parameters 300-307. The tablebelow gives the options for programming the inputs.The digital inputs require a signal of 0 or 24 V DC. Asignal lower than 5 V DC is a logic ‘0’, while a signalhigher than 10 V DC is a logic ‘1’.The terminals for the digital inputs can be connectedto the internal 24 V DC supply, or an external 24 V DCsupply can be connected.The drawings in the next column show one Setupusing the internal 24 V DC supply and one Setupusing an external 24 V DC supply.

Digital inputs terminal no. 16 17 18 19 27 29 32 33parameter 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307

Value:

No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0]Reset (RESET) [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]Coasting stop, inverse (COAST INVERSE) [0]Reset and coasting stop, inverse(RESET & COAST INVERSE) [1]Start (START) [1]Reversing (REVERSE) [1]Reversing and start (START REVERSE) [2]DC-braking, inverse (DC BRAKE INVERSE) [3] [2]Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [3]Freeze reference (FREEZE REFERENCE) [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [3] [3] [3] [3] [3]Selection of Setup, lsb (SETUP SELECT LSB) [4] [4] [4]Selection of Setup, msb (SETUP SELECT MSB) [4] [5] [4]Preset reference, on (PRESET REF. ON) [5] [5] [6] [5] [5]Preset reference, lsb (PRESET REF. LSB) [6] [7] [6]Preset reference, msb (PRESET REF. MSB) [6] [8] [6]Speed down (SPEED DOWN) [7] [9] [7]Speed up (SPEED UP) [7] [10] [7]Run permissive (RUN PERMISSIVE) [8] [8] [11] [8] [8]Jog (JOG) [9] [9] [12] [9] [9]Data change lock (PROGRAMMING LOCK) [10] [10] [13] [10] [10]Pulse reference (PULSE REFERENCE) [11] [14]Pulse feedback (PULSE FEEDBACK) [11]Hand start (HAND START) [11] [12] [15] [11] [12]

Switch 4, which is located on the Dipswitch control card, is used forseparating the common potential ofthe internal 24 V DC supply from the

common potential of the external 24 V DC supply. SeeElectrical installation.Please note that when Switch 4 is in the OFF position, theexternal 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from theVLT AFD.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Function:In parameters 300-307 Digital inputs it is possible tochoose between the different possible functionsrelated to the digital inputs (terminals 16-33).The functional options are given in the table on theprevious page.


No function No function No function No function No function is selected if the VLT AFD is not toreact to signals transmitted to the terminal.

Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset resets the VLT AFD after an alarm; however, notall alarms can be reset (trip locked) cycling line powersupply. See table in List of warnings and alarms.Reset will be activate on the rising edge of the signal.

Coasting stop, inverse Coasting stop, inverse Coasting stop, inverse Coasting stop, inverse Coasting stop, inverse is used to force the VLTAFD to "release" the motor immediately (the outputtransistors are "turned off") to make it coast freely tostop. Logic ‘0’ implements coasting to stop.

Reset and coasting stop, inverse Reset and coasting stop, inverse Reset and coasting stop, inverse Reset and coasting stop, inverse Reset and coasting stop, inverse is used foractivating coasting stop at the same time as reset.Logic ‘0’ implements coasting stop and reset.Reset will be activate on the falling edge of thesignal.

DC braking, inverse DC braking, inverse DC braking, inverse DC braking, inverse DC braking, inverse is used for stopping the motorby energizing it with a DC voltage for a given time,see parameters 114-116 DC brake.Please note that this function is only active if the valueof parameters 114 DC brake current and 115 DCbraking time is different from 0. Logic ‘0’ implementsDC braking. See DC braking.

Safety interlock Safety interlock Safety interlock Safety interlock Safety interlock has the same function as Coastingstop, inverse, but Safety interlock generates the alarmmessage ’external fault’ on the display when terminal27 is logic ‘0’. The alarm message will also be activevia digital outputs 42/45 and relay outputs 1/2, ifprogrammed for Safety interlock. The alarm can bereset using a digital input or the [OFF/STOP] key.

Start Start Start Start Start is selected if a start/stop command is required.Logic ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’ = stop.

Reversing Reversing Reversing Reversing Reversing is used for changing the direction ofrotation of the motor shaft. Logic ‘0’ will notimplement reversing. Logic ‘1’ will implementreversing.

The reversing signal only changes the direction of ro-tation; it does not activate the start function.It can not be used in Closed loop.

Reversing and start Reversing and start Reversing and start Reversing and start Reversing and start is used for start/stop andreversing using the same signal.A start signal via terminal 18 at the same time is notallowed.Is not active together with Closed loop.

Freeze referenceFreeze referenceFreeze referenceFreeze referenceFreeze reference freezes the present reference. Thefrozen reference can now only be changed by meansof Speed up or Speed down. The frozen reference issaved after a stop command and in case of linefailure.

Freeze output Freeze output Freeze output Freeze output Freeze output freezes the present output frequency(in Hz). The frozen output frequency can now only bechanged by Speed up or Speed down.

NOTE:If Freeze output is active, the VLT AFD cannotbe stopped via terminal 18. The VLT AFD can

only be stopped when terminal 27 or terminal 19 hasbeen programmed for DC braking, inverse.

Selection of Setup, lsb Selection of Setup, lsb Selection of Setup, lsb Selection of Setup, lsb Selection of Setup, lsb and Selection of Setup, Selection of Setup, Selection of Setup, Selection of Setup, Selection of Setup,msb msb msb msb msb enables a choice of one of the four Setups.However, this assumes that parameter 002 ActiveSetup has been set at Multi Setup [5].

Setup, msb Setup, lsbSetup 1 0 0Setup 2 0 1Setup 3 1 0Setup 4 1 1

Preset reference, onPreset reference, onPreset reference, onPreset reference, onPreset reference, on is used for switching betweenremote reference and preset reference. This assumesthat Remote/preset [2] has been selected inparameter 210 Reference type. Logic ‘0’ = remotereferences active; logic ‘1’ = one of the four presetreferences is active in accordance with the table onthe next page.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Preset reference, lsb Preset reference, lsb Preset reference, lsb Preset reference, lsb Preset reference, lsb and Preset reference, msbPreset reference, msbPreset reference, msbPreset reference, msbPreset reference, msbenables a choice of one of the four preset references,in accordance with the table below.

Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsbPreset ref. 1 0 0Preset ref. 2 0 1Preset ref. 3 1 0Preset ref. 4 1 1

Speed upSpeed upSpeed upSpeed upSpeed up and and and and and Speed downSpeed downSpeed downSpeed downSpeed down are selected if digitalcontrol of the up/down speed is desired. This functionis only active if Freeze reference or Freeze output hasbeen selected.As long as there is a logic ‘1’ on the terminal selectedfor Speed up, the reference or the output frequencywill increase by the Ramp-up time set in parameter206.As long as there is a logic ‘1’ on the terminal selectedfor Speed down, the reference or the outputfrequency will increase by the Ramp-down time set inparameter 207.Pulses (logic ‘1‘ minimum high for 3 ms and a mini-mum pause of 3 ms) will lead to a change of speed of0.1% (reference) or 0.1 Hz (output frequency).

Example:Terminal Terminal Freeze ref./

(16) (17) Freeze outputNo speed change 0 0 1Speed down 0 1 1Speed up 1 0 1Speed down 1 1 1

The speed reference frozen via the control panelcan be changed even if the VLT AFD has stopped.In addition, the frozen reference will be rememberdin case of a line failure.

Run permissive.Run permissive.Run permissive.Run permissive.Run permissive. There must be an active start signalvia the terminal, where Run permissive has beenprogrammed, before a start command can beaccepted. Run permissive has a logic ‘AND’ functionrelated to Start (terminal 18, parameter 302 Terminal18, Digital input), which means that in order to startthe motor, both conditions must be fulfilled. If Runpermissive is programmed on several terminals, Runpermissive must only be logic ‘1’ on one of theterminals for the function to be carried out.

Jog Jog Jog Jog Jog is used to override the output frequency to thefrequency set in parameter 209 Jog frequency and issuea start command. If local reference is active, the VLT AFDwill always be in Open loop [0], regardless of the selectionmade in parameter 100 Configuration.Jog is not active if a stop command has been given viaterminal 27.

Data change lockData change lockData change lockData change lockData change lock is selected if data changes toparameters are not to be made via the control unit;however, it will still be possible to carry out data changesvia the bus.

Pulse referencePulse referencePulse referencePulse referencePulse reference is selected if a pulse sequence(frequency) is selected as a reference signal.0 Hz corresponds to RefMIN, parameter 204 Minimum re-ference, RefMIN.The frequency set in parameter 327 Pulse reference, max.frequency corresponds to parameter 205 Maximum refe-rence, RefMAX.

Pulse feedbackPulse feedbackPulse feedbackPulse feedbackPulse feedback is selected if a pulse sequence (frequency)is selected as a feedback signal.Parameter 328 Pulse feedback, max. frequency is wherethe maximum frequency for pulse feedback is set.

Hand startHand startHand startHand startHand start is selected if the VLT AFD is to be controlledby means of an external hand/off or H-O-A switch. A logic‘1’ (Hand start active) will mean that the VLT AFD startsthe motor. A logic ‘0’ means that the connected motorstops. The VLT AFD will then be in OFF/STOP mode,unless there is an active Auto start signal. See also thedescription in Local control.

NOTE:An active Hand and Auto signal via the digitalinputs will have higher priority than the [HAND

START]-[AUTO START] control keys.

Auto startAuto startAuto startAuto startAuto start is selected if the VLT AFD is to be controlled viaan external auto/off or H-O-A switch. A logic ’1’ will placethe VLT AFD in auto mode allowing a start signal on thecontrol terminals or the serial communication port. If Autostart and Hand start are active at the same time on thecontrol terminals, Auto start will have the highest priority. IfAuto start and Hand start are not active, the connectedmotor will stop and the VLT AFD will then be in OFF/STOPmode. See also the description in Local control.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Value:

No operation (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0]Reference (REFERENCE [1] [1] [1] Feedback (FEEDBACK) [2] [2] [2]Thermistor (THERMISTOR) [3] [3]

Analog inputsTwo analog inputs for voltage signals (terminals 53and 54) are provided for reference and feedbacksignals. Furthermore, an analog input is available for acurrent signal (terminal 60). A thermistor can beconnected to voltage input 53 or 54.The two analog voltage inputs can be scaled in therange of 0-10 V DC; the current input in the range of0-20 mA.

The table below gives the possibilities forprogramming the analoge inputs.Parameter 317 Time out and 318 Function aftertime out allow activation of a time-out function on allanaloge inputs. If the signal value of the reference orfeedback signal connected to one of the analoge in-put terminals drops to below 50% of the minimumscaling, a function will be activated after the time outdetermined in parameter 318, Function after time out.

Analog inputs terminal no. 53(voltage) 54(voltage) 60(current)parameter 308 311 314

308 Terminal 53, analog input voltage(AI [V] 53 FUNCT.)

Function:This parameter is used to select the required functionto be linked to terminal 53.

Description of choice:No operation.No operation.No operation.No operation.No operation. Is selected if the VLT AFD is not toreact to signals connected to the terminal.

ReferenceReferenceReferenceReferenceReference..... Is selected to enable change of referenceby means of an analog reference signal.If reference signals are connected to several inputs,these reference signals must be added up.

Feedback.Feedback.Feedback.Feedback.Feedback. If a feedback signal in connected, there isa choice of a voltage input (terminal 53 or 54) or acurrent input (terminal 60) as feedback. In the case ofzone regulation, feedback signals must be selectedas voltage inputs (terminals 53 and 54).See Feedback handling.

ThermistorThermistorThermistorThermistorThermistor..... Is selected if a thermistor integrated in themotor is to be able to stop the VLT AFD in case ofmotor overtemperature. The cut-out value is 3 kohm.If a motor features a thermal switch instead, this canalso be connected to the input. If motors run inparallel, the thermistors/thermal switches can beconnected in series (total resistance < 3 kohm).Parameter 117 Motor thermal protection must beprogrammed for Thermal warning [1] or Thermistortrip [2], and the thermistor must be inserted betweenterminal 53 or 54 (analoge voltage input) and termi-nal 50 (+10 V supply).


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

309 Terminal 53, min. scaling(AI 53 SCALE LOW)

Value:0.0 - 10.0 V 0.0 V

Function:

This parameter is used for setting the signal value thathas to correspond to the minimum reference or theminimum feedback, parameter 204 Minimumreference, RefMIN/413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN. SeeReference handling or Feedback handling .


Set the required voltage value.For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in longsignal lines can be compensated for.If the time-out function is to be applied (parameters317 Time out and 318 Function after time out), thevalue must be set to > 1 V.

310 Terminal 53, max. scaling(AI 53 SCALE HIGH)

Value:0.0 - 10.0 V 10.0 V

Function:This parameter is used for setting the signal value thathas to correspond to the maximum reference value orthe maximum feedback, parameter 204 Minimumreference, RefMIN/414 Maximum feedback, FBMAX. SeeReference handling or Feedback handling.

Description of choice:Set the required voltage value.For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in longsignal lines can be compensated for.

311 Terminal 54, analog input voltage(AI [V] 54 FUNCT.)

Value:See description of parameter 308. No operation

Function:This parameter chooses between the differentfunctions available for the input, terminal 54.

Scaling of the input signal is done in parameter 312 Ter-minal 54, min. scaling and in parameter 313 Terminal 54,max. scaling.

Description of choice:See description of parameter 308.For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal linesshould be compensated for.


Value:0.0 - 10.0 V 0.0 V

Function:This parameter is used for setting the signal value thatcorresponds to the minimum reference value or the mini-mum feedback, parameter 204 Minimum reference,RefMIN/413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN. See Referencehandling or Feedback handling.

Description of choice:Set the required voltage value.For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal linescan be compensated for.If the time-out function is to be applied (parameters 317Time out and 318 Function after time out), the value mustbe set to > 1 V.


Value:0.0 - 10.0 V 10.0 V

Function:

This parameter is used for setting the signal value thatcorresponds to the maximum reference value or themaximum feedback, parameter 204 Minimum reference,RefMIN/414 Maximum feedback, FBMAX. See Referencehandling or Feedback handling.

Description of choice:Set the required voltage value.For reasons of accuracy, voltage losses in long signal linescan be compensated for.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


314 Terminal 60, analog input current(AI [mA] 60 FUNCT.)

Value:See description of parameter 308. Reference

Function:This parameter allows a choice between the differentfunctions available for the input, terminal 60.Scaling of the input signal is done in parameter 315Terminal 60, min. scaling and in parameter 316 Ter-minal 60, max. scaling.

Description of choice:See description of parameter 308 Terminal 53,analogue input voltage.


Value:

0.0 - 20.0 mA 4.0 mA

Function:This parameter determines the signal value thatcorresponds to the minimum reference or theminimum feedback, parameter 204 Minimumreference, RefMIN/413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN. SeeReference handling or Feedback handling.


Set the required current value.If the time-out function is to be used (parameters 317Time out and 318 Function after time out), the valuemust be set to > 2 mA.


Value:0.0 - 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

Function:This parameter determines the signal value thatcorresponds to the maximum reference value,parameter 205 Maximum reference value, RefMAX. SeeReference handling or Feedback handling.

Description of choice:Set the desired current value.

317 Time out(LIVE ZERO TIME)

Value:1 - 99 sec. 10 sec.

Function:If the signal value of the reference or feedback signalconnected to one of the input terminals 53, 54 or 60drops to below 50% of the minimum scaling during aperiod longer than the preset time, the functionselected in parameter 318 Function after time out willbe activated.This function will only be active if, in parameter 309 or312, a value has been selected for terminals 53 and54, min. scaling that exceeds 1 V, or if, in parameter315 Terminal 60, min. scaling, a value has beenselected that exceeds 2 mA.


318 Function after time out(LIVE ZERO FUNCT.)

Value: Off (NO FUNCTION) [0]

Freeze output frequency(FREEZE OUTPUT FREQ.) [1]Stop (STOP) [2]Jog (JOG FREQUENCY) [3]Max. output frequency (MAX FREQUENCY) [4]Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]

Function:This is where to select the function to be activatedafter the end of the time-out period (parameter 317Time out).

If a time-out function occurs at the same time as abus time-out function (parameter 556 Bus timeinterval function), the time-out function in parameter318 will be activated.

Description of choice:The output frequency of the VLT AFD can be:- frozen at the present value [1]- overruled to stop [2]- overruled to jog frequency [3]- overruled to max. output frequency [4]- overruled to stop with subsequent trip [5].


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

(depending on the value set in parameter 322 Ter-minal 45, output, pulse scaling.If the output is used as a voltage output (0-10 V), apull-down resistor of 470 Ω (max. 500 Ω) should befitted to terminal 39 (common for analog/digitaloutputs). If the output is used as a current output,the resulting impedance of the connected equipmentshould not exceed 500 Ω. .

Analog/digital outputsThe two analog/digital outputs (terminals 42 and 45)can be programmed to show the present status or aprocess value such as 0 - fMAX.If the VLT AFD is used as a digital output, it givesthe present status by means of 0 or 24 V DC.If the analoge output is used for giving a processvalue, there is a choice of three types of output sig-nals: 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or 0-32000 pulses

Analog/digital outputs terminal no. 42 45parameter 319 321

Value:No function (NO FUNCTION) [0] [0]Drive ready (UN. READY) [1] [1]Standby (STAND BY) [2] [2]Running (RUNNING) [3] [3]Running at ref. value (RUNNING AT REFERENCE) [4] [4]Running, no warning (RUNNING NO WARNING) [5] [5]Local reference active (DRIVE IN LOCAL REF.) [6] [6]Remote references active (DRIVE IN REMOTE REF.) [7] [7]Alarm (ALARM) [8] [8]Alarm or warning (ALARM OR WARNING) [9] [9]No alarm (NO ALARM) [10] [10]Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT) [11] [11]Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [12] [12]Start command active (START SIGNAL APPLIED) [13] [13]Reversing (RUNNING IN REVERSE) [14] [14]Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING) [15] [15]Hand mode active (DRIVE IN HAND MODE) [16] [16]Auto mode active (DRIVE IN AUTO MODE) [17] [17]Sleep mode (SLEEP MODE) [18] [18]Output frequency lower than fLOW parameter 223 (F OUT < F LOW) [19] [19]Output frequency higher than fHIGH parameter 223 (F OUT > F HIGH) [20] [20]Out of frequency range (FREQ. RANGE WARN.) [21] [21]Output current lower than ILOW parameter 221 (I OUT < I LOW) [22] [22]Output current higher than IHIGH parameter 222 (I OUT > I HIGH) [23] [23]Out of current range (CURRENT RANGE WARN) [24] [24]Out of feedback range (FEEDBACK RANGE WARN.) [25] [25]Out of reference range (REFERENCE RANGE WARN) [26] [26]Relay 123 (RELAY 123) [27] [27]Mains imbalance (MAINS IMBALANCE) [28] [28]Output frequency, 0 - fMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (OUT. FREQ. 0-20 mA) [29] [29]Output frequency, 0 - fMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (OUT. FREQ. 4-20 mA) [30] [30]Output frequency (pulse sequence), 0 - fMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (OUT. FREQ. PULSE) [31] [31]External reference, RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (EXT. REF. 0-20 mA) [32] [32]External reference, RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (EXTERNAL REF. 4-20 mA) [33] [33]External reference (pulse sequence), RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (EXTERNAL REF. PULSE) [34] [34]Feedback, FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (FEEDBACK 0-20 mA) [35] [35]Feedback, FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (FEEDBACK 4-20 mA) [36] [36]Feedback (pulse sequence), FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 0 - 32000 p (FEEDBACK PULSE) [37] [37]Output current, 0 - IMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (MOTOR CUR. 0- 20 mA) [38] [38]Output current, 0 - IMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (MOTOR CUR. 4- 20 mA) [39] [39]Output current (pulse sequence), 0 - IMAX ⇒ 0 - 32000 p (MOTOR CUR. PULSE) [40] [40]Output power, 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA (MOTOR POWER 0-20 mA) [41] [41]Output power, 0 - PNOM ⇒ 4-20 mA (MOTOR POWER 4-20 mA) [42] [42]Output power (pulse sequence), 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0- 32000 p (MOTOR POWER PULSE) [43] [43]


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Function:This output can act both as a digital or an analogoutput. If used as a digital output (data value [0]-[59]),a 0/24 V DC signal is transmitted; if used as an ana-loge output, either a 0-20 mA signal, a 4-20 mA sig-nal or a pulse sequence of 0-32000 pulses istransmitted.

Description of choice:No function.No function.No function.No function.No function. Selected if the VLT AFD is not to reactto signals.

Drive readyDrive readyDrive readyDrive readyDrive ready..... The VLT AFD control card receives asupply voltage and the AFD is ready for operation.

Stand byStand byStand byStand byStand by..... The VLT AFD is ready for operation, butno start command has been given. No warning.

Running.Running.Running.Running.Running. A start command has been given.

Running at ref. value.Running at ref. value.Running at ref. value.Running at ref. value.Running at ref. value. Speed according to reference.

Running, no warning.Running, no warning.Running, no warning.Running, no warning.Running, no warning. A start command has beengiven. No warning.

Local reference active.Local reference active.Local reference active.Local reference active.Local reference active. The output is active whenthe motor is controlled by means of the localreference via the control unit.

Remote references active.Remote references active.Remote references active.Remote references active.Remote references active. The output is activewhen the VLT AFD is controlled by means of theremote references.

Alarm.Alarm.Alarm.Alarm.Alarm. The output is activated by an alarm.

Alarm or warning.Alarm or warning.Alarm or warning.Alarm or warning.Alarm or warning. The output is activated by analarm or a warning.

No alarm.No alarm.No alarm.No alarm.No alarm. The output is active when there is noalarm.

Current limit.Current limit.Current limit.Current limit.Current limit. The output current is greater than thevalue programmed in parameter 215 Current limit ILIM.

Safety interlock. Safety interlock. Safety interlock. Safety interlock. Safety interlock. The output is active when terminal27 is a logic ‘1’ and Safety interlock has beenselected on the input.

Start command active.Start command active.Start command active.Start command active.Start command active. Is active when there is a startcommand or the output frequency is above 0.1 Hz.

Reversing.Reversing.Reversing.Reversing.Reversing. There is 24 V DC on the output whenthe motor rotates counter-clockwise. When the mo-tor rotates clockwise, the value is 0 V DC.

Thermal warning. Thermal warning. Thermal warning. Thermal warning. Thermal warning. The temperature limit in either themotor, the VLT AFD or a thermistor connected to ananalogue input has been exceeded.

Hand mode active. Hand mode active. Hand mode active. Hand mode active. Hand mode active. The output is active when theVLT AFD is in Hand mode.

Auto mode active. Auto mode active. Auto mode active. Auto mode active. Auto mode active. The output is active when the VLTAFD is in Auto mode.

Sleep mode. Sleep mode. Sleep mode. Sleep mode. Sleep mode. Active when the VLT AFD is in Sleepmode.

Output frequency lower than fOutput frequency lower than fOutput frequency lower than fOutput frequency lower than fOutput frequency lower than fLOWLOWLOWLOWLOW..... The outputfrequency is lower than the value set in parameter223 Warning: Low frequency, fLOW.

Output frequency higher than fOutput frequency higher than fOutput frequency higher than fOutput frequency higher than fOutput frequency higher than fHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH..... The outputfrequency is higher than the value set in parameter224 Warning: High frequency, fHIGH .

Out of frequency range.Out of frequency range.Out of frequency range.Out of frequency range.Out of frequency range. The output frequency isoutside the frequency range programmed inparameter 223 Warning: Low frequency, fLOW and 224Warning: High frequency, fHIGH.

Output current lower than IOutput current lower than IOutput current lower than IOutput current lower than IOutput current lower than ILOWLOWLOWLOWLOW. . . . . The output current islower than the value set in parameter 221 Warning:Low current, ILOW.

Output current higher than IOutput current higher than IOutput current higher than IOutput current higher than IOutput current higher than IHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH..... The output currentis higher than the value set in parameter 222 Warning:High current, IHIGH.

Out of current range.Out of current range.Out of current range.Out of current range.Out of current range. The output current is outsidethe range programmed in parameter 221 Warning:Low current, ILOW and 222 Warning, High current, IHIGH.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Out of feedback range. Out of feedback range. Out of feedback range. Out of feedback range. Out of feedback range. The feedback signal is outsidethe range programmed in parameter 227 Warning:Low feedback, FBLOW and 228 Warning: Highfeedback, FBHIGH.

Out of reference range.Out of reference range.Out of reference range.Out of reference range.Out of reference range. The reference lies outsidethe range programmed in parameter 225 Warning:Low reference, RefLOW and 226 Warning, Highreference, RefHIGH.

Relay 123.Relay 123.Relay 123.Relay 123.Relay 123. This function is only used when a profibusoption card is installed.

Mains imbalance.Mains imbalance.Mains imbalance.Mains imbalance.Mains imbalance. This output is activated at too highline imbalance or when a phase is missing in the linesupply. Check the line voltage to the VLT AFD.

0-f0-f0-f0-f0-fMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA and0-f0-f0-f0-f0-fMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA and0-f0-f0-f0-f0-fMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p, which generates an outputsignal proportional to the output frequency in theinterval 0 - fMAX (parameter 202 Output frequency,high limit, fMAX).

External RefExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefMINMINMINMINMIN - Ref - Ref - Ref - Ref - RefMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA andExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefMINMINMINMINMIN - Ref - Ref - Ref - Ref - RefMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA andExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefExternal RefMINMINMINMINMIN - Ref - Ref - Ref - Ref - RefMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p, whichgenerates an output signal proportional to theresulting reference value in the interval Minimumreference, RefMIN - Maximum reference, RefMAX

(parameters 204/205).

FBFBFBFBFBMINMINMINMINMIN-FB-FB-FB-FB-FBMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA andFBFBFBFBFBMINMINMINMINMIN-FB-FB-FB-FB-FBMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA andFBFBFBFBFBMINMINMINMINMIN-FB-FB-FB-FB-FBMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p, an output signal propor-tional to the reference value in the interval Minimumfeedback, FBMIN - Maximum feedback, FBMAX

(parameters 413/414) is obtained.

0 - I0 - I0 - I0 - I0 - IVLVLVLVLVLTTTTT, MAX, MAX, MAX, MAX, MAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA and0 - I0 - I0 - I0 - I0 - IVLVLVLVLVLTTTTT, MAX, MAX, MAX, MAX, MAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA and0 - I0 - I0 - I0 - I0 - IVLVLVLVLVLTTTTT, MAX, MAX, MAX, MAX, MAX ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p, an output signal proportio-nal to the output current in the interval 0 - IVLT,MAX isobtained.

0 - P0 - P0 - P0 - P0 - PNOMNOMNOMNOMNOM ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA 0-20 mA and0 - P0 - P0 - P0 - P0 - PNOMNOMNOMNOMNOM ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA and0 - P0 - P0 - P0 - P0 - PNOMNOMNOMNOMNOM ⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒ 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p 0-32000 p, which generates an outputsignal proportional to the present output power. 20mA corresponds to the value set in parameter 102Motor power, PM,N.

320 Terminal 42, output, pulse scaling(AO 42 PULS SCALE)

Value:1 - 32000 Hz 5000 Hz

Function:This parameter allows scaling of the pulse outputsignal.

Description of choice:Set the desired value.

321 Terminal 45, output(AO 45 FUNCTION)

Value:See description of parameter 319 Terminal 42, Output.

Function:This output can function both as a digital or an analogoutput. When used as a digital output (data value [0]-[26])it generates a 24 V (max. 40 mA) signal. For the analogoutputs (data value [27] - [41]) there is a choice of 0-20mA, 4-20 mA or a pulse sequence.

Description of choice:See description of parameter 319 Terminal 42, Output.

322 Terminal 45, output, pulse scaling(AO 45 PULS SCALE)

Value:1 - 32000 Hz 5000 Hz

Function:This parameter allows scaling of the pulse outputsignal.

Description of choice:Set the desired value.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Relay outputsRelay outputs 1 and 2 can be used to give thepresent status or a warning.

Relay 11 - 3 break, 1 - 2 makeMax. 240 V AC, 2 Amp.The relay is placed with theline and motor terminals.

Relay outputs Relay no. 1 2parameter 323 326

Value:No function (NO FUNCTION) [0] [0]Ready signal (READY) [1] [1]Standby (STAND BY) [2] [2]Running (RUNNING) [3] [3]Running at ref. value (RUNNING AT REFERENCE) [4] [4]Running, no warning (RUNNING NO WARNING) [5] [5]Local reference active (DRIVE IN LOCAL REF) [6] [6]Remote references active (DRIVE IN REMOTE REF.) [7] [7]Alarm (ALARM) [8] [8]Alarm or warning (ALARM OR WARNING) [9] [9]No alarm (NO ALARM) [10] [10]Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT) [11] [11]Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [12] [12]Start command active (START SIGNAL APPLIED) [13] [13]Reversing (RUNNING IN REVERSE) [14] [14]Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING) [15] [15]Hand mode active (DRIVE IN HAND MODE) [16] [16]Auto mode active (DRIVE IN AUTO MODE) [17] [17]Sleep mode (SLEEP MODE) [18] [18]Output frequency lower than fLOW parameter 223 (F OUT < F LOW) [19] [19]Output frequency higher than fHIGH parameter 224 (F OUT > F HIGH) [20] [20]Out of frequency range (FREQ RANGE WARN.) [21] [21]Output current lower than ILOW parameter 221 (I OUT < I LOW) [22] [22]Output current higher than IHIGH parameter 222 (I OUT > I HIGH) [23] [23]Out of current range (CURRENT RANGE WARN.) [24] [24]Out of feedback range (FEEDBACK RANGE WARN.) [25] [25]Out of reference range (REFERENCE RANGE WARN.) [26] [26]Relay 123 (RELAY 123) [27] [27]Mains imbalance (MAINS IMBALANCE) [28] [28]Control word 11/12 (CONTROL WORD 11/12) [29] [29]

Relay 24 - 5 makeMax. 50 V AC, 1 A, 60 VA.Max. 75 V DC, 1 A, 30 W.The relay is placed on thecontrol card, see Electricalinstallation, control cables.

Description of choice:See description of [0] - [28] in Analog/digital outputs.

Control word bit 11/12Control word bit 11/12Control word bit 11/12Control word bit 11/12Control word bit 11/12, relay 1 and relay 2 can beactivated via the serial communication. Bit 11activates relay 1 and bit 12 activates relay 2.

If the parameter 556 Bus time interval functionbecomes active, relay 1 and relay 2 will become cutoff if they are activated via the serial communication.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

323 Relay 1, output function(RELAY1 FUNCTION)

Function:This output activates a relay switch.Relay switch 01 can be used for indicating statusand warnings. The relay is activated when the con-ditions for the relevant data values have been fulfil-led.Activation/deactivation can be programmed inparameter 324 Relay 1, ON delay and parameter 325Relay 1, OFF delay.See General technical data.

Description of choice:See data choice and connections in Relay outputs.

324 Relay 01, ON delay(RELAY1 ON DELAY)


Function:This parameter allows a delay of the cut-in time ofrelay 1 (terminals 1-2).

Description of choice:Enter the desired value.

325 Relay 01, OFF delay(RELAY1 OFF DELAY)


Function:This parameter makes it possible to delay the cut-outtime of relay 01 (terminals 1-2).

Description of choice:Enter the desired value.

326 Relay 2, output function(RELAY2 FUNCTION)

Value:See functions of relay 2 on previous page.

Function:This output activates a relay switch.Relay switch 2 can be used for indicating status andwarnings. The relay is activated when the conditions forthe relevant data values have been fulfilled.See General technical data.


327 Pulse reference, max. frequency(PULSE REF. MAX)

Value:100 - 65000 Hz at terminal 29 5000 Hz100 - 5000 Hz at terminal 17

Function:This parameter is used to set the pulse value that mustcorrespond to the maximum reference, parameter 205Maximum reference, RefMAX.The pulse reference signal can be connected via terminal17 or 29.

Description of choice:Set the required maximum pulse reference.

328 Pulse feedback, max. frequency(PULSE FDBK MAX.)

Value:100 - 65000 Hz at terminal 33 25000 Hz

Function:This is where the pulse value that must correspond to themaximum feedback value is set. The pulse fedback signalis connected via terminal 33.

Description of choice:Set the desired feedback value.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Application functions 400-427

Includes this parameter group, the special functions ofthe VLT AFD PID regulation, setting of the feedbackrange and the Setup of the Sleep mode function.Additionally, this parameter group includes:- Reset function.- Flying start.- Option of interference reduction method.- Setup of any function upon loss of load, e.g.

because of a damaged V-belt.- Setting of switching frequency.- Selection of process units.

400 Reset function (RESET FUNCTION)Value:

Manual reset (MANUAL RESET) [0]Automatic reset x 1 (AUTOMATIC X 1) [1]Automatic reset x 2 (AUTOMATIC X 2) [2]Automatic reset x 3 (AUTOMATIC X 3) [3]Automatic reset x 4 (AUTOMATIC X 4) [4]Automatic reset x 5 (AUTOMATIC X 5) [5]Automatic reset x 10 (AUTOMATIC X 10) [6]Automatic reset x 15 (AUTOMATIC X 15) [7]Automatic reset x 20 (AUTOMATIC X 20) [8]Infinite automatic reset (INFINITE AUTOMATIC) [9]

Function:This parameter allows a choice of whether to reset andrestart manually after a trip, or whether the VLT AFD isto be reset and restarted automatically. In addition, thereis a choice of the number of times the unit is to attempta restart. The time between each reset attempt is set inparameter 401 Automatic restart time.

Description of choice:If Manual reset [0] is selected, resetting must beeffected via the "Reset" key or via a digital input.If the VLT AFD is to carry out an automatic reset andrestart after a trip, select data value [1]-[9].

The motor may start without warning.

401 Automatic restart time(AUTORESTART TIME)


Function:This parameter allows setting of the time from trippinguntil the automatic reset function begins.It is assumed that automatic reset has been selectedin parameter 400 Reset function.


402 Flying start(FLYING START)

Value: Disable (DISABLE) [0]

Enable (ENABLE) [1]DC brake and start (DC BRAKE AND START) [3]

Function:This function makes it possible for the VLT AFD to‘catch’ a spinning motor, which - e.g. because of aline failure - is no longer controlled by the VLT AFD.This function is activated whenever a start commandis active.For the VLT AFD to be able to catch the spinningmotor, the motor speed must be lower than thefrequency that corresponds to the frequency in pa-rameter 202 Output frequency high limit, fMAX.

Description of choice:Select Disable [0] if this function is not required.Select Enable [1] if the VLT AFD is to be able to‘catch’ and control a spinning motor.Select DC brake and start [2] if the VLT AFD is tobrake the motor with DC braking, and then restart themotor. It is assumed that parameters 114-116 DCbraking are enabled. In the case of a substantial‘windmilling’ effect (spinning motor), the VLT AFD willnot ‘catch’ a spinning motor unless DC brake andstart has been selected.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Sleep modeSleep mode makes it possible to stop the motorwhen it is running at low speed, similar to a no loadsituation. If consumption in the system goes backup, the VLT AFD will start the motor and supply thepower required.

NOTE:Energy can be saved with this function, sincethe motor is only in operation when the

system needs it.

Sleep mode is not active if Local reference or Jog hasbeen selectedThe function is active in both Open loop and Closedloop.

In parameter 403 Sleep mode timer, the Sleepmode is activated. In parameter 403 Sleep mode ti-mer, a timer is set that determines how long theoutput frequency can be lower than the frequencyset in parameter 404 Sleep frequency. When the ti-mer runs out, the VLT AFD will ramp down the mo-tor to stop via parameter 207 Ramp-down time. Ifthe output frequency rises above the frequency setin parameter 404 Sleep frequency, the timer isreset.

While the VLT AFD has stopped the motor in sleep mode,a theoretical output frequency is calculated on the basis ofthe reference signal. When the theoretical outputfrequency rises above the frequency in parameter 405Wake up frequency, the VLT AFD will restart the motor andthe output frequency will ramp up to the reference.

In systems with constant pressure regulation, it isadvantageous to provide extra pressure to the systembefore the VLT AFD stops the motor. This extends the timeduring which the VLT AFD has stopped the motor andhelps to avoid frequent starting and stopping of the motor,e.g. in the case of system leaks.If 25% more pressure is required before the VLT AFDstops the motor, parameter 406 Boost setpoint is set to125%.Parameter 406 Boost setpoint is only active in Closedloop.

NOTE:In highly dynamic pumping processes, it isrecommended to switch off the Flying Start

function (parameter 402).


VLT® 5000 AQUA


403 Sleep mode timer(SLEEP MODE TIMER)

Value:0 - 300 sec.(OFF) OFF

Function:This parameter enables the VLT AFD to stop themotor if the load on the motor is minimal.The timer in parameter 403 Sleep mode timer startswhen the output frequency drops below thefrequency set in parameter 404 Sleep frequency.When the time set in the timer has expired, the VLTAFD will turn off the motor.The VLT AFD will restart the motor, when thetheoretical output frequency exceeds the frequencyin parameter 405 Wake up frequency.

Description of choice:Select OFF if this function is not wanted.Set the threshold value that is to activate Sleep modeafter the output frequency has fallen below parameter404 Sleep frequency.

404 Sleep frequency (SLEEP FREQUENCY)Value:

000,0 - par. 405 Wake up frequency 0.0 Hz

Function:

When the output frequency falls below the presetvalue, the timer will start the time count set inparameter 403 Sleep mode. The present outputfrequency will follow the theoretical output frequencyuntil fMIN is reached.

Description of choice:Set the required frequency.

405 Wake up frequency (WAKEUP FREQUENCY)Value:

Par 404 Sleep frequency - par. 202 fMAX 60 Hz

Function:When the theoretical output frequency exceeds thepreset value, the VLT AFD restarts the motor.

Description of choice:Set the required frequency.

406 Boost setpoint (BOOST SETPOINT)Value:

0 - 200 % 100 % of setpoint

Function:This function can only be used if Closed loop hasbeen selected in parameter 100.In systems with constant pressure regulation, it isadvantageous to increase the pressure in the systembefore the VLT AFD stops the motor. This extends thetime during which the VLT AFD stops the motor andhelps to avoid frequent starting and stopping of themotor, e.g. in the case of leaks in the water supplysystem.

Description of choice:Set the required Boost setpoint as a percentage ofthe resulting reference under normal operation. 100%corresponds to the reference without boost(supplement).

407 Switching frequency(SWITCHING FREQ.)

Value:Depends on the size of the unit.

Function:The preset value determines the switching frequencyof the inverter, provided Fixed switching frequency [1]has been selected in parameter 408 Interferencereduction method. If the switching frequency ischanged, this may help to minimise possible acousticnoise from the motor.

NOTE:The output frequency of the VLT AFD cannever assume a value higher than 1/10 of the

switching frequency.

Description of choice:When the motor is running, the switching frequency isadjusted in parameter 407 Switching frequency, untilthe frequency has been achieved at which the motoris as quiet as possible.

NOTE:Switching frequencies higher than 4.5 kHzimplement automatic derating of the maximum

output of the VLT AFD. See Derating of high switchingfrequency.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

408 Interference reduction method(NOISE REDUCTION)

Value:

ASFM (ASFM) [0]Fixed switching frequency(FIXED SWITCHING FREQ.) [1]LC filter fitted (LC-FILTER CONNECTED) [2]

Function:Used to select different methods for reducing theamount of acoustic interference from the motor.

Description of choice:ASFM [0] guarantees that the maximum switchingfrequency, determined by parameter 407, is used atall times without derating of the VLT AFD. This is doneby monitoring the load.Fixed switching frequency [1] makes it possible toset a fixed high/low switching frequency. This cangenerate the best result, as the switching frequencycan be set to reduce acoustic noise in the motor.The switching frequency is adjusted in parameter407 Switching frequency. LC-filter fitted [2] is to beused if an LC-filter is fitted between the VLT AFDand the motor, as the VLT AFD will otherwise not beable to protect the LC-filter.

409 Function in case of no load(FUNCT. LOW CURR.)

Value:Trip (TRIP) [0]

Warning (WARNING) [1]

Function:This function is activated when the output currentgoes below parameter 221 Warning: Low current.

Description of choice:In the case of a Trip [1], the VLT AFD will stop themotor.If Warning [2] is selected, the VLT AFD will give awarning if the output current drops below thethreshold value in parameter 221 Warning: Lowcurrent, ILOW.

Parameter 410 and 411:NOTE:Par. 410 and 411 are not available for VLT5042-5062 AQUA 200-240 V, and VLT 5075-

5600 AQUA 380-460 V.

410 Function at line failure(MAINS FAILURE)

Value:

Trip (TRIP) [0]Autoderate & warning(AUTODERATE & WARNING) [1]Warning (WARNING) [2]

Function:Select the function which is to be activated if the lineimbalance becomes too high or if a phase is missing.

Description:At Trip [0] the VLT AFD will stop the motor within afew seconds (depending on drive size).If Autoderate & warning [1] is selected, the drive willexport a warning and reduce the output current to 30% of IVLT,N to maintain operation.At Warning [2] only a warning will be exported when aline failure occurs, but in severe cases, other extremeconditions might result in a trip.

NOTE:If Warning has been selected, the lifeexpectancy of the drive will be reduced when

the line failure persists.NOTE:At phase loss the cooling fans of NEMA 12drives cannot be powered. In order to avoid

overheating, an external power supply can beconnected, see Electrical installation.

411 Function at overtemperature(FUNCT. OVERTEMP)

Value: Trip (TRIP) [0]

Autoderate & warning(AUTODERATE & WARNING) [1]

Function:Select the function which is to be activated when theVLT is exposed to an overtemperature condition.

Description:At Trip [0] the VLT AFD will stop the motor and exportan alarm.At Autoderate & warning [1] the VLT will first reducethe switching frequency to minimize internal losses. Ifthe overtemperature condition persists, the VLT willreduce the output current until the heat sinktemperature stabilizes. When the function is active, awarning will be exported.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Feedback signals in open loopNormally, feedback signals and thus feedbackparameters are only used in Closed loop operation; inVLT 5000 AQUA units, however, the feedbackparameters are also active in Open loop operation.In Open loop mode, the feedback parameters canbe used to show a process value in the display. Ifthe present temperature is to be displayed, thetemperature range can be scaled in parameters413/414 Minimum/Maximum feedback, and the unit(°C, °F) in parameter 415 Process units.

413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN

(MIN. FEEDBACK)Value:

-999,999.999 - FBMAX 0.000

Function:Parameters 413 Minimum feedback, FBMIN and 414Maximum feedback, FBMAX are used to scale thedisplay indication, thereby ensuring that it shows thefeedback signal in a process unit proportionally to thesignal at the input.

Description of choice:Set the value to be shown on the display at minimumfeedback signal value (par. 309, 312, 315 Min.scaling) on the selected feedback input (parameters308/311/314 Analog inputs).

414 Maximum feedback, FBMAX

(MAX. FEEDBACK)Value:

FBMIN - 999,999.999 100.000

Function:See the description of par. 413 Minimum feedback,FBMIN.

Description of choice:Set the value to be shown on the display whenmaximum feedback (par. 310, 313, 316 Max. scaling)has been achieved at the selected feedback input(parameters 308/311/314 Analoge inputs).

415 Units relating to closed loop(REF. / FDBK. UNIT)

Value:No unit [0] °C [21]

% [1] GPM [22]rpm [2] gal/s [23]ppm [3] gal/min [24]pulse/s [4] gal/h [25]l/s [5] lb/s [26]l/min [6] lb/min [27]l/h [7] lb/h [28]kg/s [8] CFM [29]kg/min [9] ft3/s [30]kg/h [10] ft3/min [31]m3/s [11] ft3/h [32]m3/min [12] ft/s [33]m3/h [13] in wg [34]m/s [14] ft wg [35]mbar [15] PSI [36]bar [16] lb/in2 [37]Pa [17] HP [38]MPa [18] °F [39]mVS [19]HP [20]

Function:Selection of unit to be shown on the display.This unit will be used if Reference [unit] [2] orFeedback [unit] [3] has been selected in one of theparameters 007-010, as well as in the Display mode.In Closed loop, the unit is also used as a unit forMinimum/Maximum reference and Minimum/Maximum feedback, as well as Setpoint 1 andSetpoint 2.

Description of choice:Select the required unit for the reference/feedbacksignal.

412 Trip delay overcurrent, ILIM

(OVERLOAD DELAY)Value:

0 - 60 sec. (61=OFF) 61 sec. (OFF)

Function:When the AFD registers that the output current hasreached the current limit ILIM (parameter 215 Current limit)and stays there for the duration selected, a cut-out willbe performed.

Description of choice:Select for how long the AFD is to be able to keep upwith the output current at the current limit ILIM before itcuts out.In OFF mode, parameter 412 Trip delay overcurrent, ILIM

is inactive, i.e. cut-outs are not performed.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

PID for process controlThe PID controller maintains a constant processcondition (pressure, temperature, flow, etc.) andadjusts motor speed on the basis of a reference/setpoint and the feedback signal.A transmitter supplies the PID controller with afeedback signal from the process to indicate itsactual state. The feedback signal varies with theprocess load.This means that deviations occur between thereference/setpoint and the actual process state. Suchdeviations are evened out by the PID regulator, in thatit regulates the output frequency up or down inrelation to the deviation between the reference/setpoint and the feedback signal.The integral PID regulator in VLT 5000 AQUA unitshave been optimised for use in water applications.This means that a number of specialised functionsare available in VLT 5000 AQUA units.Using the VLT 5000 AQUA, there is no need forextra modules to be installed. For example, only onerequired reference/setpoint and the handling offeedback need to be programmed.There is a built in option for connecting two feed-back signals to the system.

Correction for voltage losses in long signal cablescan be carried out when using a transmitter with avoltage output. This is done in parameter group 300Min./Max. scaling.

FeedbackThe feedback signal must be connected to a termi-nal on the VLT AFD. Use the list below to decidewhich terminal to use and which parameters to pro-gram.

Feedback type Terminal ParametersPulse 33 307Voltage 53, 54 308, 309, 310 or

311, 312, 313Current 60 314, 315, 316Bus feedback 1 68+69 535Bus feedback 2 68+69 536

Please note that the feedback value in parameter535/536 Bus feedback 1 and 2 can only be set viaserial communication (not via the control unit).

Furthermore, the minimum and maximum feedback(parameters 413 and 414) must be set to a value inthe process unit that corresponds to the minimumand maximum scaling value for signals connected tothe terminal. The process unit is selected inparameter 415 Process units.

ReferenceIn parameter 205 Maximum reference, RefMAX, amaximum reference that scales the sum of allreferences, i.e. the resulting reference, can be set.The minimum reference in parameter 204 indicatesthe smallest value that the resulting reference canassume.The reference range cannot exceed the feedbackrange.If Preset references are required, set these inparameters 211 to 214 Preset reference. SeeReference type.See also Reference handling.If a current signal is used as a feedback signal, volt-age can be used as analog reference. Use the listbelow to decide which terminal to use and whichparameters to program.

Reference type Terminal ParametersPulse 17 or 29 301 or 305Voltage 53 or 54 308, 309, 310 or

311, 312, 313Current 60 314, 315, 316Preset reference 211, 212, 213, 214Setpoints 418, 419Bus reference 68+69

Please note that the bus reference can only be set viaserial communication.

NOTE:Terminals that are not in use may preferablybe set to No function [0].


VLT® 5000 AQUA


PID for process regulation, cont.Inverse regulationNormal regulation means that the motor speedincreases when the reference/setpoint is higher thanthe feedback signal. If there is a need for inverseregulation, in which the speed is reduced when thefeedback signal is lower than the reference/setpoint,Inverse must be programmed in parameter 420 PIDnormal/inverse control.

Anti WindupThe process regulator is factory preset with anactive anti-windup function. This function ensuresthat when either a frequency limit, current limit orvoltage limit is reached, the integrator will beinitialised for a frequency that corresponds to thepresent output frequency. This avoids integration ona deviation between the reference/setpoint and theactual state of the process, the controller of whichis not possible by means of a speed change. Thisfunction can be disabled in parameter 421 PID antiwindup.

Start-up conditionsIn some applications, optimum setting of theprocess regulator will mean that it takes an exces-sive time for the required process state to bereached. In such applications it might be anadvantage to fix an output frequency to which theVLT AFD is to bring the motor before the processregulator is activated. This is done by programminga PID start-up frequency in parameter 422.

Differentiator gain limitIf there are very quick variations in a given applicationwith respect to the reference/setpoint signal or thefeedback signal, the deviation between reference/setpoint and the actual process state will quicklychange. The differentiator may thus become toodominant. This is because it reacts to the deviationbetween the reference/setpoint and the actualprocess state. The quicker the deviation changes, thestronger the resulting differentiator frequencycontribution. The differentiator frequency contributioncan thus be limited to allow the setting of areasonable differentiation time for slow changes and asuitable frequency contribution for quick changes.This is done in parameter 426, PID Differentiator gainlimit.

Lowpass filterIf there are ripple currents/voltages on the feedbacksignal, these can be dampened by means of a built-inlowpass filter. Set a suitable lowpass filter timeconstant. This time constant represents the limitfrequency of the ripples occurring on the feedbacksignal.If the lowpass filter has been set to 0.1s, the limitfrequency will be 10 RAD/sec., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. This means that all currents/voltagesthat vary by more than 1.6 oscillations per second willbe removed by the filter.In other words, regulation will only be carried out on afeedback signal that varies by a frequency of lessthan 1.6 Hz. Choose a suitable time constant inparameter 427, PID Lowpass filter time.

Optimisation of the process regulatorThe basic settings have now been made; all thatremains to be done is to optimize the proportionalgain, the integration time and the differentiation time(parameters 423, 424 and 425). In most processes,this can be done by following the guidelines givenbelow.

1. Start the motor.2. Set parameter 423 PID proportional gain to 0.3

and increase it until the process shows that thefeedback signal is unstable. Then reduce the valueuntil the feedback signal has stabilised. Now lowerthe proportional gain by 40-60%.

3. Set parameter 424 PID integration time to 20 sand reduce the value until the process shows thatthe feedback signal is unstable. Increase theintegration time until the feedback signal stabilizes,followed by an increase of 15-50%.

4. Parameter 425 PID differentiation time is only usedin very fast-acting systems. The typical value is1/4 of the value set in parameter 424 PIDIntegration time. The differentiator should only beused when the setting of the proportional gain andthe integration time have been fully optimized.

NOTE:If necessary, start/stop can be activated anumber of times in order to provoke an

unstable feedback signal.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

PID overviewThe block diagram below shows reference andsetpoint in relation to the feedback signal.

As can be seen, the remote reference is totalled withsetpoint 1 or setpoint 2. See also Reference handling.Which setpoint is to be totalled with the remotereference depends on the selection made inparameter 417 Feedback function.

Feedback handlingThe feedback handling can be seen from the blockdiagram on the next page.The block diagram shows how and by whichparameters the feedback handling can be affected.Options as feedback signals are: voltage, current,pulse and bus feedback signals. In zone regulation,feedback signals must be selected as voltage inputs(terminals 53 and 54). Please note that Feedback 1consists of bus feedback 1 (parameter 535) totalledwith the feedback signal value of terminal 53.Feedback 2 consists of bus feedback 2 (parameter536) totalled with the feedback signal value ofterminal 54.

In addition, the VLT 5000 AQUA has an integralcalculator capable of converting a pressure signal intoa "linear flow" feedback signal. This function isactivated in parameter 416 Feedback conversion.

The parameters for feedback handling are active bothin closed and open loop modes. In open loop, thepresent temperature can be displayed by connectinga temperature transmitter to a feedback input.

In a closed loop, there are - roughly speaking - threepossibilities of using the integral PID regulator and set-point/feedback handling:1. 1 setpoint and 1 feedback2. 1 setpoint and 2 feedbacks3. 2 Setpoints and 2 feedbacks

1 setpoint and 1 feedbackIf only 1 setpoint and 1 feedback signal are used, parame-ter 418 Setpoint 1 will be added to the remote reference.The sum of the remote reference and Setpoint 1 becomesthe resulting reference, which will then be compared withthe feedback signal.

1 setpoint and 2 feedbacksJust like in the above situation, the remote reference isadded to Setpoint 1 in parameter 418. Depending on thefeedback function selected in parameter 417 Feedbackfunction, a calculation will be made of the feedback signalwith which the sum of the references and the setpoint is tobe compared. A description of the individual feedbackfunctions is given in parameter 417 Feedback function.

2 Setpoints and 2 feedbacksUsed in 2-zone regulation, where the function selected inparameter 417 Feedback function calculates the setpointto be added to the remote reference.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


416 Feedback conversion (FFEEDBACK CONV.)Value:

Linear (LINEAR) [0]Square root (SQUARE ROOT) [1]

Function:In this parameter, a function is selected whichconverts a connected feedback signal from theprocess to a feedback value that equals the squareroot of the connected signal.This is used, e.g. where regulation of a flow (volume)is required on the basis of pressure as feedbacksignal (flow = constant x √pressure). This conversionmakes it possible to set the reference in such a waythat there is a linear connection between thereference and the flow required. See drawing in nextcolumn.Feedback conversion should not be used if 2-zoneregulation in parameter 417 Feedback function hasbeen selected.

Description:If Linear [0] is selected, the feedback signal and thefeedback value will be proportional.If Square root [1] is selected, the VLT AFD translatesthe feedback signal to a squared feedback value.

Feedback handling, cont.

VLT 5000 AQUA


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

If the difference between Setpoint 1 and feedback 1 isthe larger of the two, parameter 418 Setpoint 1 will beadded to the remote reference.If the difference between Setpoint 2 and feedback 2 isthe larger of the two, the remote reference will beadded to the parameter 419 Setpoint 2.If 2-zone maximum [6] is selected, the VLT AFD willcalculate the difference between Setpoint 1 and feed-back 1 as well as Setpoint 2 and feedback 2.After the calculation, the VLT AFD will use the smal-ler difference. A negative difference, i.e. one wherethe setpoint is lower than the feedback, is alwayssmaller than a positive difference.If the difference between Setpoint 1 and feedback 1is the smaller of the two, the remote reference will beadded to the parameter 418 Setpoint 1.If the difference between Setpoint 2 and feedback 2is the smaller of the two, the remote reference will beadded to parameter 419 Setpoint 2.

418 Setpoint 1 (SETPOINT 1)Value:

RefMIN - RefMAX 0.000

Function:Setpoint 1 is used in closed loop as the reference tocompare the feedback values with. See descriptionof parameter 417 Feedback function.The setpoint can be offset with digital, analog or busreferences, see Reference handling.Used in Closed loop [1] parameter 100 Configura-tion.

Description of choice:Set the required value. The process unit is selected inparameter 415 Process units.

417 Feedback function(2 FEEDBACK, CALC.)

Value:Minimum (MINIMUM) [0]

Maximum (MAXIMUM) [1]Sum (SUM) [2]Difference (´DIFFERENCE) [3]Average (AVERAGE) [4]2-zone minimum (2 ZONE MIN) [5]2-zone maximum (2 ZONE MAX) [6]

Function:This parameter allows a choice between differentcalculation methods whenever two feedback signalsare used.

Description of choice:If Minimum [0] is selected, the VLT AFD will comparefeedback 1 with feedback 2 and regulate on the ba-sis of the lower feedback value.Feedback 1 = Sum of parameter 535 Bus feedback1 and the feedback signal value of terminal 53.Feedback 2 = Sum of parameter 536 Bus feedback2 and the feedback signal value of terminal 54.

If Maximum [1] is selected, the VLT AFD willcompare feedback 1 with feedback 2 and regulateon the basis of the higher feedback value.If Sum [2] is selected, the VLT AFD will total feed-back 1 with feedback 2. Please note that theremote reference will be added to Setpoint 1.If Difference [3] is selected, the VLT AFD willsubtract feedback 1 from feedback 2.If Average [4] is selected, the VLT AFD will calculatethe average of feedback 1 and feedback 2. Pleasenote that the remote reference will be added to theSetpoint 1.

If 2-zone minimum [5] is selected, the VLT AFD willcalculate the difference between Setpoint 1 andfeedback 1 as well as Setpoint 2 and feedback 2.After this calculation, the VLT AFD will use the largerdifference. A positive difference, i.e. a setpoint higherthan the feedback, is always larger than a negativedifference.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


421 PID anti windup(PID ANTI WINDUP)

Value:Off (DISABLE) [0]

On (ENABLE) [1]

Function:It is possible to choose whether the process regula-tor is to continue regulating on a deviation even if itis not possible to increase/reduce the outputfrequency.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:The factory setting is On [1], which means that theintegration link is adjusted to the actual outputfrequency if either the current limit, the voltage limitor the max./min. frequency has been reached. Theprocess regulator will not be engaged again, untileither the deviation is zero or its prefix has changed.Select Off [0] if the integrator is to continue integratingto the deviation even if it is not possible to remove thedeviation by regulation.

NOTE:If Off [0] is selected, it will mean that when thedeviation changes its prefix, the integrator will

first have to integrate down from the level obtained asa result of the former error, before any change to theoutput frequency occurs.

422 PID start-up frequency(PID START VALUE)

Value:

fMIN-fMAX (parameter 201 and 202) 0 Hz

Function:When the start signal comes, the VLT AFD will reactin the form of Open loop [0] following the ramp. Onlywhen the programmed start frequency has beenobtained, will it change over to Closed loop [1]. Inaddition, it is possible to set a frequency thatcorresponds to the speed at which the processnormally runs, which will enable the required processconditions to be reached sooner.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

419 Setpoint 2 (SETPOINT 2)Value:

RefMIN - RefMAX 0.000

Function:Setpoint 2 is used in closed loop as the reference tocompare the feedback values with. See descriptionof parameter 417 Feedbackfunction.The setpoint can be offset with digital, analog or bussignals, see reference handling.Used in Closed loop [1] parameter 100 Configura-tion and only if 2-zone minimum/maximum isselected in parameter 417 Feedbackfunction.

Description of choice:Set the required value. The process unit is selected inparameter 415 Process units.

420 PID normal/inverse control(PID NOR/INV. CTRL)

Value: Normal (NORMAL) [0]

Inverse (INVERSE) [1]

Function:It is possible to choose whether the process regulatoris to increase/reduce the output frequency if there is adeviation between reference/setpoint and the actualprocess state.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:If the VLT AFD is to reduce the output frequency incase the feedback signal increases, select Normal[0].If the VLT AFD is to increase the output frequency incase the feedback signal increases, select Inverse [1].


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Description of choice:Set the required start frequency.

NOTE:If the VLT AFD is running at the current limitbefore the desired start frequency is obtained,

the process regulator will not be activated. For the re-gulator to be activated anyway, the start frequencymust be lowered to the required output frequency.This can be done during operation.

NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:NOTE:PID start frequency is always applied inclockwise direction.

423 PID proportional gain(PID PROP. GAIN)

Value:0.00 - 10.00 0.01

Function:The proportional gain indicates the number of timesthe deviation between the reference/setpoint and thefeedback signal is to be applied.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:Quick regulation is obtained by a high gain, but if thegain is too high, the process may become unstable.

424 PID start-up frequency(PID INTEGR.TIME)

Value:0.01 - 9999.00 sec. (OFF) OFF

Function:The integrator provides a constant change of theoutput frequency during constant error between thereference/setpoint and the feedback signal.The greater the error, the quicker the integratorfrequency contribution will increase. The integrationtime is the time needed by the integrator to reach thesame gain as the proportional gain for a givendeviation.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:Fast regulation is obtained in connection with a short inte-gration time. However, this time may be too short, whichmeans that the process may be destabilised as a result ofoverswings.If the integral time is long, major deviations from therequired set point may occur, since the process regulatorwill take a long time to regulate in relation to a given error.

425 PID differentiation time(PID DIFF. TIME)

Value:0.00 (OFF) - 10.00 sec. OFF

Function:The differentiator does not react to a constant error. It onlycontributes when the error changes.The quicker the error changes, the stronger the contribut-ion from the differentiator will be. This influence is propor-tional to the speed by which the deviation changes.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:Fast regulation can be obtained by means of a long diffe-rentiation time. However, this time may be too long, whichmeans that the process may be destabilised as a result ofoverswings.

426 PID differentiator gain limit(PID DIFF. GAIN)

Value:5.0 - 50.0 5.0

Function:It is possible to set a limit for the differentiator gain. Thedifferentiator gain will increase if there are fast changes,which is why it can be beneficial to limit this gain, therebyobtaining a pure differentiator gain at slow changes and aconstant differentiator gain where quick changes to thedeviation are made.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:Select a limit to differentiator gain as required.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


427 PID lowpass filter time(PID FILTER TIME)

Value:0.01 - 10.00 0.01

Function:Oscillations on the feedback signal are dampenedby the lowpass filter in order to reduce their impacton the process regulation. This can be anadvantage if there is a lot of noise on the signal.Used in Closed loop [1] (parameter 100).

Description of choice:Select the desired time constant (τ). If a time constant(τ) of 0.1 s is programmed, the break frequency forthe lowpass filter will be 1/0.1 = 10 RAD/sec.,corresponding to (10/(2 x π)) = 1.6 Hz.The process regulator will thus only regulate a feed-back signal that varies by a frequency lower than 1.6Hz.If the feedback signal varies by a higher frequencythan 1.6 Hz, the Process regulator will not react.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Serial communication for FC protocol

Master

Slave 31 (126)Slave 2Slave 1

Address 1 Address 2 Address 31 (126)

Serial communication

Telegram communicationControl and reply telegramsThe telegram communication in a master/slavesystem is controlled by the master. A maximum of 31slaves (VLT 5000 AQUA) can be connected to onemaster, unless a repeater is used. If a repeater isused, a maximum of 126 slaves can be connected toone master.

The master continuously sends telegrams addressedto the slaves and awaits reply telegrams from these.The response time of the slaves is max. 50 ms.

Only a slave that has received a faultless telegramaddressed to that slave will response by sending areply telegram.

BroadcastA master can send the same telegram at the sametime to all slaves connected to the bus. In suchbroadcast communication, the slave does not send areply telegram to the master, provided the telegramhas been correctly received.Broadcast communication is set up in the addressformat (ADR), see the next page.Contents of a character (byte)

ProtocolsAs standard, all VLT 5000 AQUA units have a RS485 port which enables a choice among threeprotocols. The two protocols, which can beselected in parameter 500 Protocol, are thefollowing: Danfoss FC protocol Johnson Controls Metasys N2

If Danfoss FC protocol is to be selected, setparameter 500 Protocol to FC protocol [0].

A description of Johnson's Control Metasys N2 is notincluded in this Instruction manual.For further information on Metasys N2, please orderMG.60.GX.YY from your Danfoss supplier.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


- - - - - -

- - - - - -

Mastertelegram

Slavetelegram

Pausetime

Response-time

Pausetime

Each transferred character begins with a start bit.Subsequently, 8 data-bits are transferred, corre-sponding to one byte. Each character is secured via aparity bit set to "1" when there is even parity (i.e. aneven number of binary 1's in the 8 data-bits and theparity bit combined). A character ends with a stopbite and thus consists of a total of 11 bits.

Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Even Stopbit Parity bit

Telegram build-up under FC protocolEach telegram begins with a start character (STX) =02 Hex, followed by a byte that gives the telegramlength (LGE) and a byte that gives the VLT address(ADR). Then follows a number of data bytes (variable,depending on telegram type). The telegram ends witha data control byte (BCC).

STX LGE ADR Data BCC

Telegram timesThe speed of communication between a master anda slave depends on the baud rate. The baud rate ofthe VLT AFD must be the same as the baud rate ofthe master and is selected in parameter 502Baudrate.After a reply telegram from the slave, there must be aminimum pause of 2 characters (22 bits) before themaster is able to send another telegram. At abaudrate of 9600 kbaud, there must be a minimumpause of 2.3 msec. After the master has completedthe telegram, the response time of the slave back tothe master will be max. 20 msec. and there will be aminimum pause of 2 characters.

Pause time, min.: 2 charactersResponse time, min.: 2 charactersResponse time, max.: 20 msec.

The time between individual characters in a telegramis not to exceed 2 characters and the telegram mustbe completed within 1.5 times the rated telegramtime.If the baudrate is 9600 kbaud and the telegramlength is 16 baud, the telegram must be completedwithin 27.5 msec.

STX LGE ADR DATA BCC

= Time between characters

Telegram length (LGE)The telegram length is the number of data bytes plusaddress byte ADR plus data control byte BCC.

Telegrams with 4 data bytes have a length of:LGE = 4 + 1 + 1 = 6 bytesTelegrams with 12 data bytes have a length of:LGE = 12 + 1 + 1 = 14 bytesTelegrams that contain text have a length of 10+nbytes. 10 is the fixed characters, while 'n' is variable(depending on the length of the text).

VLT AFD address (ADR)Two different address formats are used, in which theaddress range of the VLT AFD is either from 1-31 orfrom 1-126.

1. Address format 1-31The byte for this address range has the followingprofile:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

00000

Bit 7 = 0 (address format 1-31 active)Bit 6 is not usedBit 5 = 1: Broadcast, address bits (0-4), not usedBit 5 = 0: No BroadcastBit 0-4 = VLT AFD address 1-31


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Data character (byte)The build-up of data blocks depends on the type oftelegram. There are three types of telegram and thetelegram type applies to both control telegram(master→slave) and reply telegram (slave→master).The three types of telegram are the following:

1. Parameter block, used for transferring parametersbetween master and slave. The data block has 12bytes (6 words) and also contains the processblock.

PKE IND PWEHIGH PWELOW PCD1 PCD2

Parameter block Process block

2. Process block, built up as a data block with fourbytes (2 words), covering:

- Control word and reference value(from master to slave)

- Status word and present output frequency(from slave to master).

PCD 1 PCD 2

Process block

3. Text block, used for reading or writing texts via thedata block.

PKE IND Ch 1 Ch2 Ch n PCD1 PCD2

Tekxt block Process block

1. Address format 1-126The byte for the 1-126 address range has thefollowing profile:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 011111

Bit 7 = 1 (address format 1-126 active)Bit 0-6 = VLT AFD address 1-126Bit 0-6 = 0 Broadcast

The slave sends the address byte back to the masterin the reply telegram in unchanged form.

Example:A telegram is sent to VLT AFD address 22 usingaddress format 1-31:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

00000 00000 00000 11111 00000 11111 11111 00000

Data control byte (BCC)The data control byte can be explained by means ofan example: Before the first byte of the telegram isreceived, the calculated check sum (BCS) is 0.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

After the first byte (02H) has been received:BCS = BCC EXOR "first byte"

(EXOR = exclusive-or gate)BCS = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

EXOR"first byte"= 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (02H)BCC = 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Each additional, subsequent byte is gated with BCSEXOR and results in a new BCC, such as:BCS = 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

EXOR"second byte" = 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 (D6H)BCC = 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0


VLT® 5000 AQUA


1. Parameter bytes

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Parameter commands and replies (AK)Bits no. 12-15 are used for transferring parametercommands from master to slave and the slave'sprocessed reply back to the master.

PNU

PKE

AK

Par

amet

erco

mm

ands

and

repl

ies

Par

amet

ernu

mbe

r

Not

in u

se

IND PWEHIGH PWELOW

If the command cannot be carried out, the slave willsend this reply (0111) Command cannot be executedand give the following error message in the parametervalue (PWE):

(reply 0111) Error message

0 The parameter number used doesnot exist

1 There is no write access to theparameter called

2 The data value exceeds theparameter limits

3 The used sub-index does not exist

4 The parameter is not of the array type

5 The data type does not match theparameter called

17 Data change in the parameter called isnot possible in the present mode of theVLT AFD. E.g. some parameters canonly be changed when the motor hasstopped

130 There is no bus access to theparameter called

131 Data change is not possible becausefactory Setup has been selected

Parameter commands master→slave:Bit no.15 14 13 12 Parameter command

0 0 0 0 No command

0 0 0 1 Read parameter value

0 0 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM(word)

0 0 1 1 Write parameter value in RAM(double word)

1 1 0 1 Write parameter value in RAMand EEPROM (double word)

1 1 1 0 Write parameter value in RAMand EEPROM (word)

1 1 1 1 Read/write text

Reply slave→master:Bit no.15 14 13 12 Reply

0 0 0 0 No reply

0 0 0 1 Parameter value transferred (word)

0 0 1 0 Parameter value transferred(double word)

0 1 1 1 Command cannot be executed

1 1 1 1 Text transferred

PKE IND PWEHIGH PWELOW

Parameter number PNU)Bits no. 0-10 are used for transmitting parameternumbers. The function of a given parameter is definedin the parameter description in the Programmingsection.

Index

Index is used together with the parameter number forread/write access to parameters with an index, suchas parameter 615 Error code.Index has 2 bytes - a lowbyte and a highbyte.However, only the lowbyte is used. See example onthe following page.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

LowbyteHighbyte

Example - Index:The first error code (index [1]) in parameter 615 Errorcode must be read.

PKE = 1267 Hex (read parameter 615 Error code).IND = 0001 Hex - Index no. 1.

1267 H 0001 H

The VLT AFD will respond in the parameter value(PWE) block by means of an error code with a valuefrom 1-99. See List of warnings and alarms to identifythe error code.

Parameter value (PWE)

The parameter value block consists of 2 words (4bytes) and its value depends on the command given(AK). If the master enquires about a parameter value,the PWE block contains no value.If a parameter value is to be changed by the master(write), the new value is entered in the PWE block andsent to the slave.If the slave responds to a parameter requirement(read command), the present parameter value istransferred in the PWE block and returned to themaster.If a parameter does not contain a numerical value,but several data selection options, e.g. parameter001 Language, where [0] is English and [1] is Danish,the data value is selected by writing the value in thePWE block. See example on the following page.

Via the serial communication it is only possible toread parameters with data type 9 (text string). In VLT5000 AQUA, parameters 621-631 Nameplate datahave data type 9. For example, it is possible inparameter 621 Unit type to read the unit size and linevoltage range.The unit type (eg. VLT6008) is displayed and the lastthree digits correspond to the last three digits in theVLT 5000 AQUA Series, i.e. VLT6008 = VLT5008.Exceptions: VLT6175 = VLT5200

VLT6225 = VLT5250VLT6275 = VLT5300

When a text string is transferred (read), the telegramlength is variable, since the texts have differentlengths. The telegram length is stated in the 2nd byteof the telegram, called LGE.In order to read a text via the PWE block, theparameter command (AK) must be set to 'F' Hex.

The index character is used to indicate whether thecommand in question is a read or write command.For a read command, the index must have thefollowing format:

04 00 H

VLT 5000 AQUA has two parameters for which a textcan be written: parameters 533 and 534 Display text,see the description of these under the parameterdescription. In order to write a text via the PWE block,the parameter command (AK) must be set to 'F' Hex.

For a write command, the index must have thefollowing format:

05 00 H

Data types supported by the VLT AFD

Datatype Description3 Integer 164 Integer 325 Unsigned 86 Unsigned 167 Unsigned 329 Text string

Unsigned means there is no sign included in thetelegram.


PKE IND PWE

LowbyteHighbyteIND

IND


VLT® 5000 AQUA






Example - Write a parameter value:Parameter 202 Output frequency high limit, fMAX is tobe changed to 100 Hz. This value must be rememberafter a power failure, so it is written in EEPROM.

PKE = E0CA Hex - Write to parameter 202Output frequency high limit, fMAX

IND = 0000 HexPWEHIGH = 0000 HexPWELOW = 03E8 Hex - Data value 1000, corre-

sponding to 100 Hz, see Conversion.

E0CA H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H

The reply from the slave to the master will be:

10CA H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H

Example - Choice of a data value:kW [20] is to be selected in parameter 415 Processunits. This value must be remembered after a powerfailure, so it is written in EEPROM.

PKE = E19F Hex - Write to parameter 415Process units

IND = 0000 HexPWEHIGH = 0000 HexPWELOW = 0014 Hex - Choose data choice kW [20]

E19F H 0000 H 0000 H 0014 H

The reply from the slave to the master will be:

119F H 0000 H 0000 H 0014 H



Example - Read a parameter value:The value in parameter 206 Ramp-up time is required.The master sends the following inquiry:

PKE = 10CE Hex - read parameter 206Ramp-up time

IND = 0000 HexPWEHIGH = 0000 HexPWELOW = 0000 Hex

10CE H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H

If the parameter value in parameter 206 Ramp-uptime is 10 seconds, the reply from the slave to themaster will be as follows:

10CE H 0000 H 0000 H 000A H


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

PCD1 PCD2Control telegram Control word Reference value(master slave)Reply telegram Status word Given(slave master) output frequency

Process wordThe process word block is divided into two blockseach of 16 bits, which always come in the sequencestated.

PCD1 PCD2

Conversion table:

Conversion Conversionindex factor

74 3.62 1001 100 1-1 0.1-2 0.01-3 0.001-4 0.0001

Conversion:The different attributes for each parameter can beseen in the section on factory settings.Since a parameter value can only be transferred as awhole number, a conversion factor must be used totransfer decimals.

Example:Parameter 201: minimum frequency, conversionfactor 0.1. If parameter 201 is to be set to 10 Hz, avalue of 100 must be transferred, since a conversionfactor of 0.1 means that the transferred value will bemultiplied by 0.1. A value of 100 will thus beunderstood as 10.0.

Control word as per FC protocolThe control word is used for transmitting commandsfrom a master (e.g. a PC) to a slave (VLT 5000 AQUA).

Master Slave

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Preset ref. lsb

01 Preset ref. msb

02 DC braking

03 Coasting stop

04 Quick stop

05 Freeze output frequency

06 Ramp stop Start

07 Reset

08 Jog

09 No function No function

10 Data not valid Data valid

11 Activate relay 1

12 Activate relay 2

13 Choice of setup lsb

14 Choice of setup msb

15 Reversing

Seriel com.ref.

Controlword

Bit 00/01:Bits 00 and 01 are used for choosing between thefour pre-programmed references (parameters 211-214 Preset reference) in accordance with thefollowing table:

Preset ref. Parameter Bit 01 Bit 001 211 0 02 212 0 13 213 1 04 214 1 1

NOTE:Parameter 508 Choice of preset reference isused to choose how bits 00/01 are to be

gated with the corresponding functions of the digitalinputs.

Bit 02, DC BRAKE:Bit 02 = 0 leads to DC braking and stop. Set brakingcurrent and duration in parameter 114 DC brakingcurrent and in parameter 115 DC braking time. Note:Parameter 504 DC brake is used for selecting how bit02 is to be gated with the corresponding function ofterminal 27.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Bit 03, Coasting stop:Bit 03 = "0" means that the VLT AFD immediately"lets go" of the motor (the output transistors are"turned off"), which means that the motor runs freelyuntil it stops.Bit 03 = "1" means that the AFD is able to start themotor, provided the other conditions for starting arefulfilled. Note: In parameter 503 Coasting stop thechoice is made of how bit 03 is to be gated with thecorresponding function of terminal 27.

Bit 04, Quick stop:Bit 04 = "0" leads to a stop in which the motor speedis ramped down to stop via parameter 207 Ramp-down time.

Bit 05, Freeze output frequency:Bit 05 = "0" means that the given output frequency (inHz) is frozen. The frozen output frequency can nowonly be changed via the digital inputs programmed forSpeed up and Speed down.

NOTE:If Freeze output is active, the VLT AFD cannotbe stopped via Bit 06 Start or via terminal 18.

The VLT AFD can only be stopped in the followingways: Bit 03 Coasting stop Terminal 27 Bit 02 DC braking Terminal 19 programmed for DC braking

Bit 06, Ramp stop/start:Bit 04 = "0" leads to a stop in which the motor speedis ramped down to stop via parameter 207 Ramp-down time.Bit 06 = "1" means that the AFD is able to start themotor, provided the other conditions for starting arefulfilled. Note: In parameter 505 Start a choice ismade of the way bit 06 Ramp stop/start is to begated with the corresponding function of terminal 18.

Bit 07, Reset:Bit 07 = "0" leads to no reset.Bit 07 = "1"means that a trip is reset.Reset is activated on the leading edge of the signal,i.e. at the change from logic '0' to logic '1'.

Bit 08, Jog:Bit 08 = "1" means that the output frequency isdetermined by parameter 209 Jog frequency.

Bit 09, No function:Bit 09 has no function.

Bit 10, Data not valid/Data valid:Used for telling the VLT 5000 AQUA whether thecontrol is to be used or ignored. Bit 10 = "0" meansthat the control word is ignored. Bit 10 = "1" meansthat the control word is used. This function is relevantbecause the control word is always contained in thetelegram, regardless of the type of telegram used, i.e.it is possible to disconnect the control word if it is notto be used in connection with updating or reading ofparameters.

Bit 11, Relay 1:Bit 11 = "0": Relay 1 is not activated.Bit 11 = "1": Relay 1 is activated, provided Controlword bits 11/12 has been selected in parameter 323Relay outputs.

Bit 12, Relay 2:Bit 12 = "0": Relay 2 is not activated.Bit 12 = "1": Relay 2 is activated, provided Controlword bits 11/12 has been selected in parameter 326Relay outputs.

NOTE:If the time-out period set in parameter 556 Bustime interval function is exceeded, relays 1 and

2 will lose their voltage if they have been activated viaserial communication.

Bits 13/14, Choice of Setup:Bits 13 and 14 are used to choose among the fourmenu Setups in accordance with the following table:Setup Bit 14 Bit 131 0 02 0 13 1 04 1 1

This function is only possible if Multi-setups has beenselected in parameter 004.Note: In parameter 507 Choice of Setup a choice ismade of the way bits 13/14 are to be gated with thecorresponding function of the digital inputs.

Bit 15, No function/reversing:Bit 15 = "0" leads to no reversing.Bit 15 = "1" leads to reversing.

Please note that, in the factory setting, reversing hasbeen selected as digital in parameter 506 Reversing,which means that bit 15 only leads to reversing, ifbus, logic or or logic and has been selected (however,logic and only together with terminal 19).


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Status word as per FC protocolThe status word is used to inform the master (e.g. aPC) of the condition of the slave (VLT 5000 AQUA).

Slave Master

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Trip Control ready

01 Drive ready

02 Stand by

03 No trip Trip04 Not in use

05 Not in use

06 Not in use

07 No warning Warning

08 Speed ≠ ref. Speed = ref.

09 Local operation Serial com. control

10 Out of frequency range

11 Running

12 No function No function

13 Voltage warninghigh/low

14 Current limit

15 Thermal warning

Bit 00, Control ready:Bit 00 = "1". The VLT AFD is ready for operation.Bit 00 = "0". The VLT AFD has tripped.

Bit 01, Drive ready:Bit 01 = "1". The VLT AFD is ready for operation, butterminal 27 is a logic '0' and/or a coasting commandhas been received via serial communication.

Bit 02, Stand by:Bit 02 = "1". The VLT AFD is able to start the motorwhen a start command is given.

Bit 03, No trip/trip:Bit 03 = "0" means that the VLT 5000 AQUA is not inan error state.Bit 03 = "1" means that the VLT 5000 AQUA hastripped and needs a reset signal in order for operationto be resumed.Bit 04, Not in use:Bit 04 is not used in the status word.

Outputfrequency

Statusword

Bit 05, Not in use:Bit 05 is not used in the status word.

Bit 06, Not in use:Bit 06 is not used in the status word.

Bit 07, No warning/warning:Bit 07 = "0" means there is no warning.Bit 07 = "1" means a warning has occurred.

Bit 08, Speed ≠ ref./speed = ref.:Bit 08 = "0" means that the motor is running, but thatthe present speed is different from the preset speedreference. This may be the case, i.a. when the speedis ramped up/down at start/stop.Bit 08 = "1" means that the present motor speedequals the preset speed reference.

Bit 09, Local operation/serial communication control:Bit 09 = "0" means that OFF/STOP has beenactivated on the control unit, or that the VLT5000AQUA is in Hand mode. It is not possible to controlthe VLT AFD via serial communication.Bit 09 = "1" means that it is possible to control theAFD via serial communication.

Bit 10, Out of frequency range:Bit 10 = "0" if the output frequency has reached thevalue in parameter 201 Output frequency low limit orparameter 202 Output frequency high limit.Bit 10 = "1" means that the output frequency is withinthe limits stated.

Bit 11, Not running/running:Bit 11 = "0" means that the motor is not running.Bit 11 = "1" means that the VLT 5000 AQUA has astart signal, or that the output frequency is greaterthan 0 Hz.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Example - control word andserial communication ref.:The VLT AFD must receive a start command, and thereference is to be set to 50 % (2000 Hex) of thereference range.

Control word = 047F Hex. Start commandReference = 2000 Hex. 50 % reference

047F H 2000 H

The VLT AFD is to receive a start command, and thereference is to be set to -50 %(-2000 Hex) of the reference range.The reference value is first converted to the firstcomplement; then 1 binary is added to get 2'scomplement:

2000 Hex = 0010 0000 0000 0000 binary

1´ komplement = 1101 1111 1111 1111 binary+ 1 binary

2´ komplement = 1110 0000 0000 0000 binary

Control word = 047F Hex. Start commandReference = E000 Hex. -50 % reference

047F H E000 H

Reference

Bit 12, No function:Bit 12 has no function.

Bit 13, Voltage warning high/low:Bit 13 = "0" means that there is no voltage warning.Bit 13 = "1" means that the DC voltage of the VLT5000 AQUA intermediate circuit is too low or too high.See the voltage limits in Warnings and alarms.

Bit 14, Current limit:Bit 14 = "0" means that the output current is smallerthan the value in parameter 215 Current limit ILIM.Bit 14 = "1" means that the output current is higherthan the value in parameter 215 Current limit ILIM andthe VLT AFD will trip after the time set in parameter412 Trip delay overcurrent, ILIM has passed.

Bit 15, Thermal warning:Bit 15 = "0" means there is no thermal warning.Bit 15 = "1" means that the temperature limit hasbeen exceeded either in the motor, in the VLT AFD orfrom a thermistor connected to an analogue input.

Serial communication reference

Master Slave

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The serial communication reference is transmitted tothe AFD in the form of a 16-bit word. The value istransmitted as whole numbers0 - ±32767 (±200 %).16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100 %.

The serial communication reference has the followingformat:

0-16384 (4000 Hex) - 0-100 % (par. 204 Minimum ref.- Par. 205 Maximum ref.).

It is possible to change the direction of rotation via theserial reference. This is done by converting the binaryreference value to 2's complement.See example.

ReferenceControl word

Serial com. ref.Controlword

Control word


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Present output frequency

Slave Master

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The value of the present output frequency of the AFDat any given time is transmitted as a 16-bit word. Thevalue is transmitted in the form of whole numbers 0 -±32767 (±200 %).16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100 %.

The output frequency has the following format:

0-16384 (4000 Hex) ≅ 0-100 % (Par. 201 Outputfrequency low limit - Par. 202 Output frequency highlimit).

Example - Status wordand present output frequency:The master receives a status message from the VLTAFD saying that the present output frequency is 50 %of the output frequency range.Par. 201 Output frequency low limit = 0 HzPar. 202 Output frequency high limit = 50 Hz

Status word = 0F03 Hex. Status messageOutput frequency = 2000 Hex. 50 % of the

frequency range,corresponding to 25 Hz.

0F03 H 2000 H

Outputfrequency

Statusword

Outputfrequency

Status word


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Serial communication 500 - 556In this parameter group, the serial communication ofthe VLT AFD is set up.There is a choice of two protocols: FC protocol,Metasys N2. In order to use serial communication,address and baudrate must always be set. Inaddition, such present operational data asreference, feedback and motor temperature can beread via serial communication.

500 Protocol (PROTOCOL)Value:

FC protocol (FC PROTOKOL) [0]Metasys N2 (METASYS N2) [1]

Function:There is a choice of two different protocols.

Description of choice:Select the required control word protocol.

501 Address (ADRESSE)Value:

Parameter 500 Protocol = FC protolkol [0]0 - 126 1

Parameter 500 Protocol = Metasys N2 [1]1 - 255 1

Function:In this parameter it is possible to allocate an addressin a serial communication network to each VLT AFD.

Description of choice:The individual VLT AFD must be given a uniqueaddress.If the number of units connected (VLT AFD + master)exceeds 31, an amplifier (repeater) must be used.Parameter 501 Address cannot be chosen via serialcommunication, but must be set via the LCP controlunit.

502 Baudrate (BAUDRATE)Value:

300 Baud (300 BAUD) [0]600 Baud (600 BAUD) [1]1200 Baud (1200 BAUD) [2]2400 Baud (2400 BAUD) [3]4800 Baud (4800 BAUD) [4]

9600 Baud (9600 BAUD) [5]

Function:In this parameter, the speed is programmed at whichdata is transmitted via serial communication.Baudrate is defined as the number of bits transmittedper second.

Description of choice:The transmission speed of the VLT AFD must be setat a value that corresponds to the transmission speedof the master. Parameter 502 Baudrate cannot beselected via serial communication; it must be set viathe LCP control unit.The data transmission time itself, which is determinedby the baudrate selected, is only part of the totalcommunication time.

503 Coasting stop (COASTING)Value:

Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]Serial communication (SERIAL PORT) [1]Logic and (LOGIC AND) [2]

Logic or (LOGIC OR) [3]

Function:In parameters 503-508, a choice can be made tocontrol the VLT AFD via the digital inputs and/or via serial communication.If Serial communication [1] is selected, the commandin question can only be activated if a command isgiven via serial communication.If Logic and [2] is selected, the function must inaddition be activated via a digital input.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Description of choice:The table below shows when the motor is runningand is coasting when Digital input [0], Serialcommunication [1], Logic and [2] or Logic or [3] hasbeen selected.

NOTE:Please note that terminal 27 and bit 03 of thecontrol word are active in the case of logic '0'.

Digital input [0] Serial communication [1]Serial Serial

Kl. 27 com. Function Kl. 27 com. Function0 0 Coasting 0 0 Coasting0 1 Coasting 0 1 Motor run.1 0 Motor run. 1 0 Coasting1 1 Motor run. 1 1 Motor run.

Logic and [2] Logic or [3]Serial Serial

Kl. 27 com. Function Kl. 27 com. Function0 0 Coasting 0 0 Coasting0 1 Motor run. 0 1 Coasting1 0 Motor run. 1 0 Coasting1 1 Motor run. 1 1 Motor run.

Digital input [0] Serial communication [1]Term. Serial Term. Seriel19/27 com. Function 19/27 com. Function

0 0 DC-brake 0 0 DC-brake0 1 DC-brake 0 1 Motor run.1 0 Motor run. 1 0 DC-brake1 1 Motor run. 1 1 Motor run.

Logic and [2] Logic or [3]Term. Serial Term. Serial19/27 com. Function 19/27 com. Function

0 0 DC-brake 0 0 DC-brake0 1 Motor run. 0 1 DC-brake1 0 Motor run. 1 0 DC-brake1 1 Motor run. 1 1 Motor run.

505 Start (START)Value:

Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]Serial communication (SERIAL PORT) [1]Logic and(LOGIC AND) [2]


Function:See the functional description under parameter 503Coasting.

Description of choice:The table below shows when the motor has stoppedand gives the situations in which the VLT AFD has astart command when Digital input [0], Serialcommunication [1], Logic and [2] or Logic or [3] hasbeen selected.


Kl. 18 com. Function Kl. 18 com. Function0 0 Stop 0 0 Stop0 1 Stop 0 1 Start1 0 Start 1 0 Stop1 1 Start 1 1 Start


Kl. 18 com. Function Kl. 18 com. Function0 0 Stop 0 0 Stop0 1 Stop 0 1 Start1 0 Stop 1 0 Start1 1 Start 1 1 Start

504 DC brake (DC BRAKE)Value:



Function:See functional description under parameter 503Coasting.

Description of choice:The table below shows when the motor is runningand is DC-braking when Digital input [0], Serialcommunication [1], Logic and [2] or Logic or [3] hasbeen selected.

NOTE:Please note that DC braking inverse [3] viaterminal 19, terminal 27 and bit 03 of the

control word is active in the case of logic '0'.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


507 Selection of Setup (SELECTING OF SETUP)508 Selection of preset reference

(SELECTING OF SPEED)Value:



Function:See the functional description under parameter 503Coasting.

Description of choice:The table below shows the Setup (parameter 002Active Setup) that has been selected viaDigital input [0], Serial communication [1],Logic and [2] or Logic or [3].The table also shows the preset reference(parameters 211-214 Preset reference) that has beenselected via Digital input [0], Serial communication [1],Logic and [2] or Logic or [3].

Digital input [0]Bus Bus Setup/Preset Setup/Preset Setup nr.msb lsb msb lsb Preset ref. no.

0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 20 0 1 0 30 0 1 1 40 1 0 0 10 1 0 1 20 1 1 0 30 1 1 1 41 0 0 0 11 0 0 1 21 0 1 0 31 0 1 1 41 1 0 0 11 1 0 1 21 1 1 0 31 1 1 1 4

506 Reversering (REVERSING)Value:

Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]Serial communication (SERIAL PORT) [1]Logic and (LOGIC AND) [2]Logic or (LOGIC OR) [3]

Function:

See the functional description under parameter 503Coasting.

Description of choice:The table below shows when the motor is runningclockwise and anti-clockwise when Digital input [0],Serial communication [1], Logic and [2] or Logic or [3]has been selected.


Kl. 19 com. Function Kl. 19 com. Function0 0 Clockwise 0 0 Clockwise0 1 Clockwise 0 1 Clockwise1 0 Counter-clock. 1 0 Clockwise1 1 Counter-clock. 1 1 Counter-clock.


Kl. 19 com. Function Kl. 19 com. Function0 0 Clockwise 0 0 Clockwise0 1 Clockwise 0 1 Counter-clock.

1 0 Clockwise 1 0 Counter-clock.

1 1 Counter-clock. 1 1 Counter-clock.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Description, cont.:

Serial communication [1]Bus Bus Setup/Preset Setup/Preset Setup no.msb lsb msb lsb Preset ref. no.

0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 10 0 1 0 10 0 1 1 10 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 20 1 1 0 20 1 1 1 21 0 0 0 31 0 0 1 31 0 1 0 31 0 1 1 31 1 0 0 41 1 0 1 41 1 1 0 41 1 1 1 4

Logic and [2]Bus Bus Setup/Preset Setup/Preset Setup no.msb lsb msb lsb Preset ref. no.

0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 10 0 1 0 10 0 1 1 10 1 0 0 10 1 0 1 20 1 1 0 10 1 1 1 21 0 0 0 11 0 0 1 11 0 1 0 31 0 1 1 31 1 0 0 11 1 0 1 21 1 1 0 31 1 1 1 4

Logic or [3]Bus Bus Setup/Preset Setup/Preset Setup no.msb lsb msb lsb Preset ref. no.

0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 20 0 1 0 30 0 1 1 40 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 20 1 1 0 40 1 1 1 41 0 0 0 31 0 0 1 41 0 1 0 31 0 1 1 41 1 0 0 41 1 0 1 41 1 1 0 41 1 1 1 4


VLT® 5000 AQUA


509 - 532 Data read-out

Value:

ParameterParameterParameterParameterParameter DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription Display textDisplay textDisplay textDisplay textDisplay text UnitUnitUnitUnitUnit UpdatingUpdatingUpdatingUpdatingUpdatingno.no.no.no.no. intervalintervalintervalintervalinterval509 Resulting reference (REFERENCE %) % 80 msec.510 Resulting reference [unit] (REFERENCE [UNIT]) Hz, rpm 80 msec.511 Feedback [unit] (FEEDBACK) Par. 415 80 msec.512 Frequency [Hz] (FREQUENCY) Hz 80 msec.513 User-defined read-out (CUSTOM READOUT) Hz x scaling 80 msec.514 Motor current [A] (CURRENT) Amp 80 msec.515 Power [kW] (POWER KW) kW 80 msec.516 Power [HP] (POWER HK) HP 80 msec.517 Motor voltage [V] (MOTOR VOLT) VAC 80 msec.518 DC link voltage [V] (DC LINK VOLTAGE) VDC 80 msec.519 Thermal load, motor [%] (MOTOR TEMPERATURE) % 80 msec.520 Thermal load, VLT [%] (VLT TEMPERATURE) % 80 msec.521 Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) Binary 80 msec.522 Terminal 53, analog input [V] (TERMINAL 53, ANALOG INPUT) Volt 20 msec.523 Terminal 54, analog input [V] (TERMINAL 54, ANALOG INPUT) Volt 20 msec.524 Terminal 60, analogue input [mA] (TERMINAL 60, ANALOG INPUT) mA 20 msec.525 Pulse reference [Hz] (PULSE REFERENCE) Hz 20 msec.526 External reference [%] (EXTERNAL REFERENCE) % 20 msec.527 Status word (STATUS WORD HEX) Hex 20 msec.528 Heat sink temperature [°C] (HEAT SINK TEMP.) °C 1.2 sec.529 Alarm word (ALARM WORD, HEX) Hex 20 msec.530 Control word (VLT CONTROL WORD, HEX) Hex 2 msec.531 Warning word (WARNING WORD) Hex 20 msec.532 Extended status word (STATUS WORD) Hex 20 msec.

Function:These parameters can be read out via the serialcommunication port and via the display. See alsoparameters 007-010 Display read-out.

Description of choice:Resulting rResulting rResulting rResulting rResulting referefereferefereference, parameter 509:ence, parameter 509:ence, parameter 509:ence, parameter 509:ence, parameter 509:gives a percentage for the resulting reference in therange from Minimum reference, RefMIN to Maximumreference, RefMAX. See also Reference handling.

Resulting rResulting rResulting rResulting rResulting referefereferefereference [unit], parameter 510:ence [unit], parameter 510:ence [unit], parameter 510:ence [unit], parameter 510:ence [unit], parameter 510:gives the resulting reference by means of the unit Hzin Open loop (parameter 100). In Closed loop, thereference unit is selected in parameter 415 Units withclosed loop.

Feedback [unit], parameter 511:Feedback [unit], parameter 511:Feedback [unit], parameter 511:Feedback [unit], parameter 511:Feedback [unit], parameter 511:gives the resulting feedback value by means of theunit/scaling selected in parameters 413, 414 and 415.See also Feedback handling.

FrFrFrFrFrequency [Hz], parameter 512:equency [Hz], parameter 512:equency [Hz], parameter 512:equency [Hz], parameter 512:equency [Hz], parameter 512:gives the output frequency from the VLT AFD.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

TTTTTerminal 54, analogue input [V], parameter 523:erminal 54, analogue input [V], parameter 523:erminal 54, analogue input [V], parameter 523:erminal 54, analogue input [V], parameter 523:erminal 54, analogue input [V], parameter 523:Gives the voltage value of the signal on terminal 54.

TTTTTerminal 60, analogue input [mA], parameter 524:erminal 60, analogue input [mA], parameter 524:erminal 60, analogue input [mA], parameter 524:erminal 60, analogue input [mA], parameter 524:erminal 60, analogue input [mA], parameter 524:Gives the current value of the signal on terminal 60.

Pulse rPulse rPulse rPulse rPulse referefereferefereference [Hz], parameter 525:ence [Hz], parameter 525:ence [Hz], parameter 525:ence [Hz], parameter 525:ence [Hz], parameter 525:Gives a pulse frequency in Hz connected to one ofthe terminals 17 and 29.

ExterExterExterExterExternal rnal rnal rnal rnal referefereferefereference, parameter 526:ence, parameter 526:ence, parameter 526:ence, parameter 526:ence, parameter 526:Gives the sum of external references as a percentage(sum of analog/pulse/serial communication) in therange from Minimum reference, RefMIN to Maximumreference, RefMAX.

Status worStatus worStatus worStatus worStatus word, parameter 527:d, parameter 527:d, parameter 527:d, parameter 527:d, parameter 527:Gives the present status word of the VLT AFD in Hex.

Heat sink temperaturHeat sink temperaturHeat sink temperaturHeat sink temperaturHeat sink temperature, parameter 528:e, parameter 528:e, parameter 528:e, parameter 528:e, parameter 528:Gives the present heat sink temperature of the VLTAFD. The cut-out limit is 90 ± 5 °C, while cutting backin is effected at 60 ± 5 °C.

Alarm worAlarm worAlarm worAlarm worAlarm word, parameter 529:d, parameter 529:d, parameter 529:d, parameter 529:d, parameter 529:Gives a Hex code for the alarm on the VLT AFD. SeeWarning words 1+2 and Alarm word.

ContrContrContrContrControl worol worol worol worol word, parameter 530:d, parameter 530:d, parameter 530:d, parameter 530:d, parameter 530:Gives the present control word of the VLT AFD in Hex.

WWWWWarararararning worning worning worning worning word, parameter 531:d, parameter 531:d, parameter 531:d, parameter 531:d, parameter 531:Indicates in Hex whether there is a warning on theVLT AFD. See Warning words 1+2 and Alarm word.

Extended status worExtended status worExtended status worExtended status worExtended status word, parameter 532:d, parameter 532:d, parameter 532:d, parameter 532:d, parameter 532:Indicates in Hex code whether there is a warning onthe VLT AFD. See Warning words 1+2 and Alarmword.

Description of choices under parameters 509-523,

cont.:UserUserUserUserUser-defined r-defined r-defined r-defined r-defined read-out, parameter 513:ead-out, parameter 513:ead-out, parameter 513:ead-out, parameter 513:ead-out, parameter 513:gives a user-defined value calculated on the basis ofthe present output frequency and unit, as well as thescaling in selected in parameter 005 Max. value ofuser-defined read-out. The unit is selected inparameter 006 Unit for user-defined read-out.

Motor currMotor currMotor currMotor currMotor current [A], parameter 514:ent [A], parameter 514:ent [A], parameter 514:ent [A], parameter 514:ent [A], parameter 514:Gives the motor phase current measured as aneffective value.

Power [kW], parameter 515:Power [kW], parameter 515:Power [kW], parameter 515:Power [kW], parameter 515:Power [kW], parameter 515:Gives the present power absorption of the motor inkW.

Power [HP], parameter 516:Power [HP], parameter 516:Power [HP], parameter 516:Power [HP], parameter 516:Power [HP], parameter 516:Gives the present power absorption of the motor inHP.

Motor voltage, parameter 517:Motor voltage, parameter 517:Motor voltage, parameter 517:Motor voltage, parameter 517:Motor voltage, parameter 517:Gives the voltage fed to the motor.

DC link voltage, parameter 518:DC link voltage, parameter 518:DC link voltage, parameter 518:DC link voltage, parameter 518:DC link voltage, parameter 518:Gives the intermediate circuit voltage of the VLT AFD.

Thermal load, motor [%], parameter 519:Thermal load, motor [%], parameter 519:Thermal load, motor [%], parameter 519:Thermal load, motor [%], parameter 519:Thermal load, motor [%], parameter 519:Gives the calculated/estimated thermal load on themotor. 100 % is the cut-out limit. See also parameter117 Motor thermal protection.

Thermal prThermal prThermal prThermal prThermal protection, VLotection, VLotection, VLotection, VLotection, VLT [%], parameter 520:T [%], parameter 520:T [%], parameter 520:T [%], parameter 520:T [%], parameter 520:Gives the calculated/estimated thermal load on theVLT AFD. 100 % is the cut-out limit.

Digital input, parameter 521:Digital input, parameter 521:Digital input, parameter 521:Digital input, parameter 521:Digital input, parameter 521:Gives the signal status of the 8 inputs (16, 17, 18, 19,27, 29, 32 and 33). Input 16 corresponds to the bit tothe extreme left.'0' = no signal, '1' = signal connected.

TTTTTerminal 53, analogue input [V], parameter 522:erminal 53, analogue input [V], parameter 522:erminal 53, analogue input [V], parameter 522:erminal 53, analogue input [V], parameter 522:erminal 53, analogue input [V], parameter 522:Gives the voltage value of the signal on terminal 53.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


533 Display text 1 (DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 1)Value:

Max. 20 characters [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Function:Here, a text of max. 20 characters can be written thatwill be shown in display line 1, provided LCP displaytext [27] has been selected in parameter 007 Largedisplay read-out. Example of display text.

Description of choice:Write the required text via serial communication.

534 Display text 2 (DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 2)Value:

Max. 8 characters [XXXXXXXX]

Function:Here, a text of max. 8 characters can be written thatwill be shown in display line 2, provided LCP displaytext [27] has been selected in parameter 007 Largedisplay read-out.

Description of choice:Write the required text via serial communication.

535 Bus feedback 1 (BUS FEEDBACK1)Value:

0 - 16384 decimal (0 - 4000 Hex) 0

Function:Via the serial communication port, this parameterallows writing of a bus feedback value which will thenform part of the feedback handling (see Feedbackhandling). Bus feedback 1 will be added to anyfeedback value registered on terminal 53.

Description of choice:Write the required bus feedback value via serialcommunication.

536 Bus feedback 2 (BUS FEEDBACK 2)Value:

0 - 16384 decimal (0 - 4000 Hex) 0

Function:Via serial communication, a bus feedback value couldbe written in this parameter that would subsequentlybecome part of the feedback handling system (seeFeedback handling). Bus feedback 2 will be added toany feedback value on terminal 54.

Description of choice:Write the required bus feedback value via the serialcommunication.

SETUP

1

CLEANING SYSTEM NO. 2

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

VLT NO.8NOTE:Parameters 555 Bus time interval and 556 Bustime interval function are only active when FC

protocol [0] has been selected in parameter 500Protocol.

555 Bus time interval (BUS TIME INTERVAL)Value:

1 - 65534 sec. 60 sec.

Function:In this parameter, the time is set which is expected topass as a maximum between the receipt of twotelegrams in a row. If this time is exceeded, the serialcommunication is assumed to have stopped and therequired reaction is set in parameter 556 Bus timeinterval function.

Description of choice:Set the required time.

556 Bus time interval function (BUS TIME INTERVAL FUNCTION)

Value: Off (OFF) [0]

Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [1]Stop (STOP) [2]Jogging (JOG FREQUENCY) [3]Max. output frequency (MAX FREQUENCY) [4]Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]

Function:In this parameter, the required reaction from the VLTAFD is selected when the time set in parameter 555Bus time interval has been exceeded.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Description of choice:The output frequency of the VLT AFD can be frozenat the present value at any given time, frozen atparameter 211 Preset reference 1, frozen atparameter 202 Max. output frequency, or stop andactivate a cut-out.

560 N2 Override release time (N2 OVER.REL.TIME)

Value:

1 - 65534 (OFF) sec. OFF

Function:In this parameter, the maximum time is set which isexpected to pass between the receipt of two N2telegrams in a row. If this time is exceeded, the serialcommunication is assumed to have stopped and allpoints in the N2 point-map which are overridden willbe released in the order below:1. Release Analog Outputs from point address (NPA)

0 to 255.2. Release Binary Outputs from point address (NPA)

0 to 255.3. Release Internal Floating Points from point

address (NPA) 0 to 255.4. Release Internal Integer Points from point address

(NPA) 0 to 255.5. Release Internal Byte points from point address

(NPA) 0 to 255.


565 Bus time interval (TIME INTER.)Value:

1 - 65534 sec. 60 sec.

Function:In this parameter, the maximum time is set which isexpected to pass between the receipt of twotelegrams in a row. If this time is exceeded, the serialcommunication is assumed to have stopped and therequired reaction is set in parameter 566 Bus timeinterval function.


566 Bus time interval function(TIME FUNCT.)

Value:

Off (NO FUNCTION) [0]Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [1]Stop (STOP) [2]Jogging (JOG FREQUENCY) [3]Max. output frequency (MAX SPEED) [4]Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]

Function:In this parameter, the required reaction from thefrequency converter is selected when the time set inparameter 565 Bus time interval has beenexceeded.

Description of choice:The output frequency of the frequency converter canbe frozen at the present value at any given time,frozen at parameter 211 Preset reference 1, frozen atparameter 202 Max. output frequency, or stop andactivate a cut-out.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Warning words 1+2 and Alarm wordWarning word, extended status word and alarm wordare shown in Hex format on the display. If there ismore than one warning or alarm, a sum of the totalwarnings or alarms will be shown.The descriptions relating to the extended status wordcan be seen from in Status word as per FC protocol,and with respect to warning word, extended statusword and alarm word, the descriptions can also beread out via the serial bus in parameter 531 Warningword, 532 Extended status word and 529 Alarmword.

Hex code Extended status word00000001 Overvoltage control active00000002 Start delay00000004 Sleep boost active00000008 Sleep mode active00000010 Automatic motor adaptation

completed00000020 Automatic motor adaptation running00000040 Reversing and start00000080 Ramp operation00000100 Reversing00000200 Speed = reference00000400 Running00000800 Local ref. = 0,

Remote controlled ref. = 100001000 OFF mode = 100002000 Auto mode = 0, Hand mode = 100004000 Start blocked00008000 Start blocked signal missing00010000 Freeze output00020000 Freeze output blocked00040000 Jogging00080000 Jog blocked00100000 Stand by00200000 Stop00400000 DC stop00800000 Drive ready01000000 Relay 123 active02000000 Drive ready04000000 Control ready08000000 Start prevented10000000 Profibus OFF3 active20000000 Profibus OFF2 active40000000 Profibus OFF1 active80000000 Reserved

Hex code Warning word00000001 Reference high00000002 Fault in EEprom on control card00000004 Fault in EEprom on power card00000008 HPFB bus timeout00000010 Serial communication timeout00000020 Overcurrent00000040 Current limit00000080 Motor thermistor00000100 Motor overtemperature00000200 Inverter overtemperature00000400 Undervoltage00000800 Overvoltage00001000 Voltage warning low00002000 Voltage warning high00004000 Line failure00008000 Live zero fault00010000 Under 10 Volt (terminal 50)00020000 Reference low00040000 Feedback high00080000 Feedback low00100000 Output current high00200000 Out of frequency range00400000 Profibus communication fault00800000 Output current low01000000 Output frequency high02000000 Output frequency low04000000 AMA - motor too small08000000 AMA - motor too big10000000 AMA - check par. 102, 103, 10520000000 AMA - check par. 102, 104, 10640000000 Reserved80000000 Reserved


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Bit (Hex) Alarm word00000001 Unknown fault00000002 Trip locked00000004 Auto-optimisation not OK00000008 HPFB bus timeout00000010 Serial communication timeout00000020 ASIC fault00000040 HPFP bus timeout00000080 Standard bus timeout00000100 Short-circuiting00000200 Switchmode fault00000400 Ground fault00000800 Current limit00001000 Overcurrent00002000 Motor thermistor00004000 Motor overheated00008000 Inverter overheated00010000 Undervoltage00020000 Overvoltage00040000 Line failure00080000 Live zero fault00100000 Heat sink temperature too high00200000 Motor phase W missing00400000 Motor phase V missing00800000 Motor phase U missing01000000 Profibus communication fault02000000 Inverter fault04000000 Output current low08000000 Safety stop10000000 Reserved


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Service functions 600-631This parameter group contains functions such asoperating data, data log and fault log.

600-605 Operating data

Value:

ParameterParameterParameterParameterParameter DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription DisplayDisplayDisplayDisplayDisplay UnitUnitUnitUnitUnit RangeRangeRangeRangeRangeno.no.no.no.no. Operating data:Operating data:Operating data:Operating data:Operating data: texttexttexttexttext600 Operating hours (OPERATING HOURS) Hours 0 - 130,000.0601 Hours run (RUNNING HOURS) Hours 0 - 130,000.0602 kWh counter (KWH COUNTER) kWh -603 No. of cut-ins (POWER UP‘S) Nos. 0 - 9999604 No. of overtemps. (OVER TEMP‘S) Nos. 0 - 9999605 No. of overvoltages (OVER VOLT‘S) Nos. 0 - 9999

Parameter 602 Parameter 602 Parameter 602 Parameter 602 Parameter 602 kWh counterkWh counterkWh counterkWh counterkWh counter:::::Gives the output power of the VLT AFD. The calculation isbased on the mean value in kWh over one hour. This valuecan be reset using parameter 618 Reset of kWh counter.Range: 0 - depends on unit.

Parameter 603 Parameter 603 Parameter 603 Parameter 603 Parameter 603 No. of cut-insNo. of cut-insNo. of cut-insNo. of cut-insNo. of cut-ins:::::Gives the number of cut-ins of supply voltage to the VLTAFD.

Parameter 604 Parameter 604 Parameter 604 Parameter 604 Parameter 604 No. of overtempsNo. of overtempsNo. of overtempsNo. of overtempsNo. of overtemps:::::Gives the number of overtemperature errors on the heat-sink of the VLT AFD.

Parameter 605 Parameter 605 Parameter 605 Parameter 605 Parameter 605 No. of overNo. of overNo. of overNo. of overNo. of overvoltagesvoltagesvoltagesvoltagesvoltages:::::Gives the number of overvoltages on the intermediatecircuit voltage of the VLT AFD. The count is only takenwhen Alarm 7 Overvoltage is active.

Function:

These parameters can be read out via the serialcommunication port, as well as via the display in theparameters.

Description of choice:Parameter 600Parameter 600Parameter 600Parameter 600Parameter 600 Operating hours Operating hours Operating hours Operating hours Operating hours:::::Gives the number of hours in which the VLT AFDhas been in operation. The value is saved everyhour and when the power supply to the unit is cutoff. This value cannot be reset.

Parameter 601 Parameter 601 Parameter 601 Parameter 601 Parameter 601 Hours runHours runHours runHours runHours run:::::Gives the number of hours in which the motor hasbeen in operation since being reset in parameter 619Reset of hours-run counter. The value is saved everyhour and when the power supply to the unit is cut off.

It also has information on the nameplate data of the VLTAFD.These service functions are very useful in connection withoperating and fault analysis in an installation.

- Unit-dependent


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

Function:With these parameters, it is possible to see up to 20saved values (data logs) - [1] being the most recent and[20] the oldest log. When a start command has been gi-ven, a new entry to the data log is made every 160 ms.If there is a trip or if the motor has stopped, the 20latest data log entries will be saved and the values willbe visible in the display. This is useful, in the case ofservice after a trip.The data log number is given in square brackets; [1]

Data logs [1]-[20] can be read by first pressing[CHANGE DATA], followed by the [+/-] keys to changedata log numbers.Parameters 606-614 Data log can also be read out viathe serial communication port.

Description of choice:Parameter 606 Parameter 606 Parameter 606 Parameter 606 Parameter 606 Data log: Digital inputData log: Digital inputData log: Digital inputData log: Digital inputData log: Digital input:::::This is where the latest log data are shown in decimalcode, representing the status of the digital inputs.Translated into binary code, terminal 16 corresponds tothe bit to the extreme left and to decimal code 128. Ter-minal 33 corresponds to the bit to the extreme right andto decimal code 1.The table can be used, e.g., for converting a decimalnumber into a binary code. For example, digital 40corresponds to binary 00101000. The nearest smallerdecimal number is 32, corresponding to a signal on ter-minal 18. 40-32 = 8, corresponds to the signal on ter-minal 27.

606 - 614 Data log

Value:

ParameterParameterParameterParameterParameter DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription DisplayDisplayDisplayDisplayDisplay UnitUnitUnitUnitUnit Range Range Range Range Rangeno.no.no.no.no. Data log:Data log:Data log:Data log:Data log: texttexttexttexttext606 Digital input (LOG: DIGITAL INP) Decimal 0 - 255607 Control word (LOG: BUS COMMAND) Decimal 0 - 65535608 Status word (LOG: BUS STAT WD) Decimal 0 - 65535609 Reference (LOG: REFERENCE) % 0 - 100610 Feedback (LOG: FEEDBACK) Par. 414 -999,999.999 - 999,999.999611 Output frequency (LOG: MOTOR FREQ.) Hz 0.0 - 999.9612 Output voltage (LOG: MOTOR VOLT) Volt 50 - 1000613 Output current (LOG: MOTOR CURR.) Amp 0.0 - 999.9614 DC link voltage (LOG: DC LINK VOLT) Volt 0.0 - 999.9

63.0 %EXT. REFERENCE, %

606 DATALOG: DIGITAL INPUT

[0] 40

Terminal 16 17 18 19 27 29 32 33Decimal number 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

Parameter 607 Parameter 607 Parameter 607 Parameter 607 Parameter 607 Data log: Control wordData log: Control wordData log: Control wordData log: Control wordData log: Control word:::::This is where the latest log data are given in decimalcode for the control word of the VLT AFD.The control word read can only be changed viaserial communication.The control work is read as a decimal number whichis to be converted into hex.See the control word profile under the section Serialcommunication in the Design Guide.

Parameter 608 Parameter 608 Parameter 608 Parameter 608 Parameter 608 Data log: Status wordData log: Status wordData log: Status wordData log: Status wordData log: Status word:::::This gives the latest log data in decimal code for thestatus word.The status word is read as a decimal number which isto be converted into hex.See the status word profile under the section Serialcommunication in the Design Guide.....

Parameter 609 Parameter 609 Parameter 609 Parameter 609 Parameter 609 Data log: ReferenceData log: ReferenceData log: ReferenceData log: ReferenceData log: Reference:::::This gives the latest log data for the resultingreference.

Parameter 610 Parameter 610 Parameter 610 Parameter 610 Parameter 610 Data log:Data log:Data log:Data log:Data log: FeedbackFeedbackFeedbackFeedbackFeedback:::::This gives the latest log data for the feedback signal.

Parameter 611 Parameter 611 Parameter 611 Parameter 611 Parameter 611 Data log: Output frequencyData log: Output frequencyData log: Output frequencyData log: Output frequencyData log: Output frequency:::::This gives the latest log data for the output frequency.

Parameter 612Parameter 612Parameter 612Parameter 612Parameter 612 Data log: Output voltage Data log: Output voltage Data log: Output voltage Data log: Output voltage Data log: Output voltage:::::This gives the latest log data for the output voltage.

Parameter 613 Parameter 613 Parameter 613 Parameter 613 Parameter 613 Data log: Output currentData log: Output currentData log: Output currentData log: Output currentData log: Output current:::::This gives the latest log data for the output current.

Parameter 614 Parameter 614 Parameter 614 Parameter 614 Parameter 614 Data log: DC-link voltageData log: DC-link voltageData log: DC-link voltageData log: DC-link voltageData log: DC-link voltage:::::This gives the latest log data for the intermediatecircuit voltage.

SETUP

1


VLT® 5000 AQUA


615 Fault log: Error code(F. LOG: ERROR CODE)

Value:[Index 1-10] Error Code: 0 - 99

Function:This parameter makes it possible to see the reasonwhy a trip (cut-out of the VLT AFD) occurs.10 [1-10] log values are stored.The lowest log number [1] contains the latest/mostrecently saved data value; the highest log number [10]contains the oldest data value.If there is a trip on the VLT 5000 AQUA, it is possibleto see its cause, the time and possibly the values foroutput current or output voltage.

Description of choice:Stated as an error code in which the number refers toa table in List of warnings and alarms.The fault log is only reset after manual initialization.(See Manual initialization).

616 Fault log: Time(F. LOG: TIME)

Value:[Index 1-10] Hours: 0 - 130,000.0

Function:This parameter makes it possible to see the totalnumber of hours run in connection with the 10 latesttrips.10 [1-10] log values are stored.The lowest log number [1] contains the latest/mostrecently saved data value, while the highest lognumber [10] contains the oldest data value.


The fault log is only reset after manual initialization.(See Manual initialization).

617 Fault log: Value(F. LOG: VALUE)

Value:[Index 1 - 10] Value: 0 - 9999

Function:This parameter makes it possible to see the value atwhich a trip occurred. The unit of the value dependson the alarm active in parameter 615 Fault log: Errorcode.

Description of choice:The fault log is only reset after manual initialization.(See Manual initialization).

618 Reset of kWh counter(RESET KWH COUNT)

Value: No reset (DO NOT RESET) [0]

Reset (RESET COUNTER) [1]

Function:Reset to zero of parameter 602 kWh counter.

Description of choice:If Reset [1] has been selected and when the [OK] key ispressed, the kWh counter of the VLT AFD is reset. Thisparameter cannot be selected via the serial port, RS 485.

NOTE:When the [OK] key has been activated, the resethas been carried out.

619 Reset of hours-run counter(RESET RUN. HOUR)

Value: No reset (DO NOT RESET) [0]

Reset (RESET COUNTER) [1]

Function:Reset to zero of parameter 601 Hours-run.

Description of choice:If Reset [1] has been selected and when the [OK] key ispressed, parameter 601 Hours-run is reset. This parame-ter cannot be selected via the serial port,RS 485.

NOTE:When the [OK] key has been activated, the resethas been carried out.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

620 Operating mode (OPERATION MODE)Value:

Normal function (NORMAL OPERATION) [0]Function with de-activated inverter(OPER. W/INVERT.DISAB) [1]Control card test (CONTROL CARD TEST) [2]Initialisation (INITIALIZE) [3]

Function:In addition to its normal function, this parameter canbe used for two different tests.Furthermore, it is possible to reset to the defaultfactory settings for all Setups, except parameters 500Address, 501 Baud rate, 600-605 Operating data and615-617 Fault log.

Description of choice:Normal function [0] is used for normal operation of themotor.Function with de-activated inverter [1] is selected ifcontrol is desired over the influence of the controlsignal on the control card and its functions - withoutthe motor shaft running.Control card [2] is selected if control of the analogand digital inputs, analog and digital outputs, relayoutputs and the control voltage of +10 V is desired.A test connector with internal connections is requiredfor this test.

The test connector for the Control card [2] is set upas follows:

connect 4-16-17-18-19-27-29-32-33;connect 5-12;connect 39-20-55;connect 42 - 60;connect 45-53-54.

Use the following procedure for the control card test:

1) Select Control card test.2) Cut off the line supply and wait for the light in the

display to go out.3) Insert the test plug (see preceding column).4) Connect to line.5) The VLT AFD expects the [OK] key to be

pressed (the test cannot be run without LCP).6) The VLT AFD automatically tests the control

card.7) Remove the test connector and press the [OK]

key when the VLT AFD displays "TESTCOMPLETED".

8) Parameter 620 Operating mode is automaticallyset to Normal function.

If the control card test fails, the VLT AFD will display"TEST FAILED". Replace the control card.

Initialisation [3] is selected if the factory setting of theunit is to be generated without resetting parameters500 Address, 501 Baud rate, 600-605 Operating dataand 615-617 Fault log.

Procedure for initialisation:

1) Select Initialisation.2) Press the [OK] key.3) Cut off the line supply and wait for the light in the

display to go out.4) Connect to line.5) Initialisation of all parameters will be carried out in

all Setups with the exception of parameters 500Address, 501 Baud rate, 600-605 Operating dataand 615-617 Fault log.

Manual initialisation is another option.(See Manualinitialization).


VLT® 5000 AQUA


621 - 631 Nameplate

Value:

ParameterParameterParameterParameterParameter DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription Display textDisplay textDisplay textDisplay textDisplay text nr nr nr nr nr..... Nameplate:Nameplate:Nameplate:Nameplate:Nameplate:

621 Unit type (DRIVE TYPE)622 Power component (POWER SECTION)623 VLT ordering no. (ORDERING NO)624 Software version no. (SOFTWARE VERSION)625 LCP identification no. (LCP ID NO.)626 Database identification no. (PARAM DB ID)627 Power component identification no. (POWER UNIT DB ID)628 Application option type (APPLIC. OPTION)629 Application option ordering no. (APPLIC. ORDER NO)630 Communication option type (COM. OPTION)631 Communication option ordering no. (COM. ORDER NO)

Function:The main data for the unit can be read fromparameters 621 to 631 Nameplate via the display orthe serial communication port.

Description of choice:Parameter 621 Parameter 621 Parameter 621 Parameter 621 Parameter 621 Nameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit type:::::VLT type gives the unit size and line voltage. Example:VLT 5008 380-460 V.

Parameter 622 Parameter 622 Parameter 622 Parameter 622 Parameter 622 Nameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power component:::::This gives the type of power card fitted to the VLTAFD. Example: STANDARD.

Parameter 623 Parameter 623 Parameter 623 Parameter 623 Parameter 623 Nameplate: VLNameplate: VLNameplate: VLNameplate: VLNameplate: VLT ordering no.:T ordering no.:T ordering no.:T ordering no.:T ordering no.:This gives the ordering number for the VLT type inquestion. Example: 1757805.

Parameter 624 Parameter 624 Parameter 624 Parameter 624 Parameter 624 Nameplate: Software version no.:Nameplate: Software version no.:Nameplate: Software version no.:Nameplate: Software version no.:Nameplate: Software version no.:This gives the present software version number of theunit. Example: V 1.00.

Parameter 625 Parameter 625 Parameter 625 Parameter 625 Parameter 625 Nameplate: LCP identification no.:Nameplate: LCP identification no.:Nameplate: LCP identification no.:Nameplate: LCP identification no.:Nameplate: LCP identification no.:This gives the identification number of the LCP of theunit. Example: ID 1.42 2 kB.

Parameter 626 Parameter 626 Parameter 626 Parameter 626 Parameter 626 Nameplate: Database identificationNameplate: Database identificationNameplate: Database identificationNameplate: Database identificationNameplate: Database identificationno.:no.:no.:no.:no.:This gives the identification number of the software’sdatabase. Example: ID 1.14.

Parameter 627 Parameter 627 Parameter 627 Parameter 627 Parameter 627 Nameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentidentification no.:identification no.:identification no.:identification no.:identification no.:This gives the identification number of the database of theunit. Example: ID 1.15.

Parameter 628 Parameter 628 Parameter 628 Parameter 628 Parameter 628 Nameplate: Application option type:Nameplate: Application option type:Nameplate: Application option type:Nameplate: Application option type:Nameplate: Application option type:This gives the type of application options fitted with theVLT AFD.

Parameter 629 Parameter 629 Parameter 629 Parameter 629 Parameter 629 Nameplate: Application option orderingNameplate: Application option orderingNameplate: Application option orderingNameplate: Application option orderingNameplate: Application option orderingno.:no.:no.:no.:no.:This gives the ordering number for the application option.

Parameter 630 Parameter 630 Parameter 630 Parameter 630 Parameter 630 Nameplate: Communication option type:Nameplate: Communication option type:Nameplate: Communication option type:Nameplate: Communication option type:Nameplate: Communication option type:This gives the type of communication options fitted withthe VLT AFD.

Parameter 631 Parameter 631 Parameter 631 Parameter 631 Parameter 631 Nameplate: Communication option orde-Nameplate: Communication option orde-Nameplate: Communication option orde-Nameplate: Communication option orde-Nameplate: Communication option orde-ring no.:ring no.:ring no.:ring no.:ring no.:This gives the ordering number for the communication op-tion.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Pro

gra

mm

ing

700 Relay 6, function (RELAY6 FUNCTION)703 Relay 7, function (RELAY7 FUNCTION)706 Relay 8, function (RELAY8 FUNCTION)709 Relay 9, function (RELAY9 FUNCTION)Function:

This output activates a relay switch.Relay outputs 6/7/8/9 can be used for showing statusand warnings. The relay is activated when theconditions for the relevant data values have beenfulfilled.Activation/deactivation can be programmed inparameters 701/704/707/710 Relay 6/7/8/9, ONdelay and parameters 702/705/708/711 Relay 6/7/8/9, OFF delay.


701 Relay 6, ON delay (RELAY6 ON DELAY)704 Relay 7, ON delay (RELAY7 ON DELAY)707 Relay 8, ON delay (RELAY8 ON DELAY)710 Relay 9, ON delay (RELAY9 ON DELAY)Value:

0 - 600 sec. 0 sec.

Function:This parameter allows a delay of the cut-in time ofrelays 6/7/8/9 (terminals 1-2).

Description of choice:Enter the required value.

702 Relay 6, OFF delay (RELAY6 OFF DELAY)705 Relay 7, OFF delay (RELAY7 OFF DELAY)708 Relay 8, OFF delay (RELAY8 OFF DELAY)711 Relay 9, OFF delay (RELAY9 OFF DELAY)Value:

0 - 600 sec. 0 sec.

Function:This parameter is used to delay the cut-out time ofrelays 6/7/8/9 (terminals 1-2).

Description of choice:Enter the required value.

NOTE:Parameters 700-711 for the relay card are onlyactivated if a relay option card is installed in

the VLT 5000 AQUA. Relay 6-9:A-B make, A-C breakMax. 240 V AC, 2 Amp.Max. cross-section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG 28-16)Torque: 4.5 - 5 In lbScrew size: M2

Electrical installation of the relay cardThe relays are connected as shown below.

To achieve double isolation, the plastic foil must bemounted as shown in the drawing below.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Status messagesStatus messages appear in the 4th line of the display- see example below.The left part of the status line indicates the activetype of control of the VLT AFD.The centre part of the status line indicates the activereference.The last part of the status line gives the presentstatus, e.g. "Running", "Stop" or "Stand by".

Auto mode (AUTO)The VLT AFD is in Auto mode, i.e. control is carriedout via the control terminals and/or serialcommunication. See also Auto start.

Hand mode (HAND)The VLT AFD is in Hand mode, i.e. control is carriedout via the control keys. See Hand start.

OFF (OFF)OFF/STOP is activated either by means of the controlkey, or by the digital inputs Hand start and Auto startboth being a logic ‘0’. See also OFF/STOP

Local reference (LOCAL)If LOCAL has been selected, the reference is set viathe [+/-] keys on the control panel. See also Displaymodes.

Remote reference (REM.)If REMOTE has been selected, the reference is set viathe control terminals or via serial communication. Seealso Display modes.

Running (RUNNING)The motor speed now corresponds to the resulting refe-rence.

Ramp operation (RAMPING)The output frequency is now changed in accordance withthe preset ramps.

Auto-ramp (AUTO RAMP)Parameter 208 Automatic ramp-up/down is enabled, i.e.the VLT AFD is trying to avoid a trip from overvoltage byincreasing its output frequency.

Sleep Boost (SLEEP .BST)The boost function in parameter 406 Boost setpoint isenabled. This function is only possible in Closed loop ope-ration.

Sleep mode (SLEEP)The energy saving function in parameter 403 Sleep modetimer is enabled. This means that at present the motor hasstopped, but that it will restart automatically whenrequired.

Start delay (START DEL)A start delay time has been programmed i parameter 111Start delay. When the delay has passed, the outputfrequency will start by ramping up to the reference.

Run request (RUN REQ.)A start command has been given, but the motor will bestopped until a Run permissive signal is received via a di-gital input.

Jogging (JOG)Jog has been enabled via a digital input or via serialcommunication.

Jog request (JOG REQ.)A JOG command has been given, but the motor willremain stopped until a Run permissive signal is receivedvia a digital input.

Freeze output (FRZ.OUT.)Freeze output has been enabled via a digital input.

SETUP

1

80.0% 5.08A 2.15kW

AUTO REMOTE RUNNING

40.0Hz

HANDOFF

STOPRAMPINGJOGGING....STAND BY

LOCAL

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Inst

alla

tio

n

Status messages, cont.

Freeze output request (FRZ.REQ.)A freeze output command has been given, but themotor will remain stopped until a Run permissivesignal is received via a digital input.

Reversing and start (START F/R)Reversing and start [2] on terminal 19 (parameter 303Digital inputs) and Start [1] on terminal 18 (parameter302 Digital inputs) are enabled at the same time. Themotor will remain stopped until one of the signalsbecomes a logic ‘0’.

Automatic Motor Adaptation running (AMA RUN)Automatic motor adaptation has been enabled inparameter 107 Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA.

Automatic Motor Adaptation completed(AMA STOP)Automatic motor adaptation has ben completed.The VLT AFD is now ready for operation after theReset signal has been enabled. Please note that themotor will start after the VLT AFD has received theReset signal.

Stand by (STANDBY)The VLT AFD is able to start the motor when a startcommand is received.

Stop (STOP)The motor has been stopped via a stop signal froma digital input, [OFF/STOP]-buttom or serialcommunication.

DC stop (DC STOP)The DC brake in parameter 114-116 has beenenabled.

DRIVE ready (UN. READY)The VLT AFD is ready for operation, but terminal 27is a logic ‘0’ and/or a Coasting command has beenreceived via the serial communi-cation.

Not ready (NOT READY)The VLT AFD is not ready for operation, because ofa trip or because OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3 is a logic ‘0’.

Start disabled (START IN.)This status will only be displayed if, in parameter 599Statemachine, Profidrive [1] has been selected andOFF2 or OFF3 is a logic ‘0’.

Exceptions XXXX (EXCEPTIONS XXXX)The microprocessor of the control card has stoppedand the VLT AFD is out of operation.The cause may be noise on the line, motor orcontrol cables, leading to a stop of the control cardmicroprocessor.Check for EMC-correct connection of these cables.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


List of warnings and alarmsThe table gives the different warnings and alarms andindicates whether the fault locks the VLT AFD. AfterTrip locked, the line supply must be cut and the faultmust be corrected. Reconnect the line supply andreset the VLT AFD before being ready. A Trip can bereset manually in three ways1) Via the control key [RESET]2) Via a digital input3) Via serial communication

In addition, an automatic reset may be selected inparameter 400 Reset function.

Wherever a cross is placed under both Warning andAlarm, this can mean that a warning precedes the alarm.It can also mean that it is possible to program whether agiven fault is to result in a warning or an alarm. This ispossible, e.g. in parameter 117 Motor thermal protection.After a trip, the motor will be coasting and on the VLTAFD alarm and warning will flash. If the fault is removed,only the alarm will flash. After a reset, the VLT AFD will beready to start operation again.

No. Description Warning Alarm Trip locked1 10 Volts low (10 VOLT LOW) X2 Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR) X X4 Mains imbalance (MAINS IMBALANCE) X X X5 Voltage warning high (DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH) X6 Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW) X7 Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT) X X8 Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT) X X9 Inverter overloaded (INVERTER TIME) X X

10 Motor overloaded (MOTOR TIME) X X11 Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR) X X12 Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT) X X13 Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT) X X14 Ground fault (GROUND FAULT) X X15 Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT) X X16 Short-circuit (CURR.SHORT CIRCUIT) X X17 Serial communication timeout (STD BUSTIMEOUT) X X18 HPFB bus timeout (HPFB TIMEOUT) X X19 Fault in EEprom on power card (EE ERROR POWER) X20 Fault in EEprom on control card (EE ERROR CONTROL) X22 Auto-optimisation not OK (AMA FAULT) X29 Heat-sink temperature too high (HEAT SINK OVERTEMP.) X X30 Motor phase U missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE U) X31 Motor phase V missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE V) X32 Motor phase W missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE W) X34 HBFB communication fault (HBFB COMM. FAULT) X X37 Inverter fault (GATE DRIVE FAULT) X X39 Check parameters 104 and 106 (CHECK P.104 & P.106) X40 Check parameters 103 and 105 (CHECK P.103 & P.106) X41 Motor too big (MOTOR TOO BIG) X42 Motor too small (MOTOR TOO SMALL) X60 Safety stop (EXTERNAL FAULT) X61 Output frequency low (FOUT < FLOW) X62 Output frequency high (FOUT > FHIGH) X63 Output current low (I MOTOR < I LOW) X X64 Output current high (I MOTOR > I HIGH) X65 Feedback low (FEEDBACK < FDB LOW) X66 Feedback high (FEEDBACK > FDB HIGH) X67 Reference low (REF. < REF. LOW) X68 Reference high (REF. > REF. HIGH) X69 Temperature auto derate (TEMP.AUTO DERATE) X99 Unknown fault (UNKNOWN ALARM) X X

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

WarningsA warning will flash in line 2, while an explanation isgiven in line 1.

SETUP

1

WARNING 1Under 10 V (10 VOLT LOW)The 10 V voltage from terminal 50 on the control cardis below 10 V.Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10Volts supply is overloaded. Max. 17 mA/min. 590 Ω.

WARNING/ALARM 2Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR)The current or voltage signal on terminal 53, 54 or 60is below 50% of the value preset in parameter 309,312 and 315 Terminal, min. scaling.

WARNING/ALARM 4Mains imbalance (MAINS IMBALANCE)High imbalance or phase missing on the supply side.Check the supply voltage to the VLT AFD.

Alarm/warning limits:VLT 5000 AQUA 3 x 200 - 240 V 3 x 380 - 460 V

[VDC] [VDC]Undervoltage 211 402Voltage warning low 222 423Voltage warning high 384 737Overvoltage 425 765

The voltages stated are the intermediate circuit voltage of the VLT AFD with a tolerance of ± 5 %. Thecorresponding line voltage is the intermediate circuit voltage divided by √2.

AlarmsIf an alarm is given, the present alarm number will beshown in line 2. Lines 3 and 4 of the display will offeran explanation.

WARNING 5Voltage warning high(DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH)The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher thanVoltage warning high, see table below. The controls ofthe VLT AFD are still enabled.

WARNING 6Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW)The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower thanVoltage warning low, see table below. The controls ofthe VLT AFD are still enabled.

WARNING/ALARM 7Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT)If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher thanthe Overvoltage limit of the inverter (see table below),the VLT AFD will trip after a fixed period. The lengthof this period depends on the unit.

ALARM:12 SETUP

1

TRIP (RESET)

CURRENT LIMIT

WARN. 3MAINS PHASE FAULT


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Warnings and alarms, cont.

WARNING/ALARM 8Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT)If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops belowthe undervoltage limit of the inverter, the VLT AFDwill trip after a fixed period, the length of the perioddepending on the unit.Furthermore, the voltage will be stated in the display.Check whether the supply voltage matches the VLTAFD, see Technical data.

WARNING/ALARM 9Inverter overload (INVERTER TIME)The electronic, thermal inverter protection reportsthat the AFD is about to cut out because of an over-load (too high current for too long). The counter forelectronic, thermal inverter protection gives awarning at 98% and trips at 100%, while giving analarm. The VLT AFD cannot be reset until thecounter is below 90%.The fault is that the VLT AFD is overloaded by morethan 100% for too long.

WARNING/ALARM 10Motor overtemperature (MOTOR TIME)According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR),the motor is too hot. Parameter 117 Motor thermalprotection allows a choice of whether the VLT AFDis to give a warning or an alarm when the Motorthermal projection reaches 100%. The fault is thatthe motor is overloaded by more than 100% of thepreset, rated motor current for too long. Check thatthe motor parameters 102-106 have been setcorrectly.

WARNING/ALARM 11Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR)The thermistor or the thermistor connection has beendisconnected. Parameter 117 Motor thermalprotection allows a choice of whether the VLT AFD isto give a warning or an alarm. Check that thethermistor has been correctly connected betweenterminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and terminal 50(+ 10 V supply).

WARNING/ALARM 12Current limit (CURRENT LIMIT)The current is higher than the value in parameter215 Current limit ILIM and the VLT AFD trips after thetime set in parameter 412 Trip delay overcurrent, ILIM

has passed.

WARNING/ALARM 13Overcurrent (OVER CURRENT)The inverter peak current limit (approx. 200% of the ratedcurrent) has been exceeded. The warning will last approx.1-2 seconds, following which the VLT AFD will trip andgive off an alarm.Turn off the VLT AFD and check whether the motor shaftcan be turned and whether the motor size matches theVLT AFD.

ALARM: 14Ground fault (GROUND FAULT)There is a discharge from the output phases to ground,either in the cable between the AFD and the motor or inthe motor itself.Turn off the VLT AFD and remove the ground fault.

ALARM: 15Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT)Fault in the switch mode power supply (internal± 15 V supply).Contact your Danfoss supplier.

ALARM: 16Short-circuiting (CURR. SHORT CIRCUIT)There is short-circuiting on the motor terminals or in themotor itself.Cut off the line supply to the VLT AFD and remove theshort-circuit.

WARNING/ALARM 17Serial communication timeout(STD BUSTIMEOUT)There is no serial communication with the VLT AFD.This warning will only be enabled if parameter 556 Bustime interval function has been set to a value differentfrom OFF.If parameter 556 Bus time interval function has been setto Stop and trip [5], the VLT AFD will first give off analarm, then ramp down and finally trip while giving off analarm. It is possible to increase parameter 555 Bus timeinterval.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE [2]AMA has detected an asymmetrical impedance in themotor connected to the system. The motor could bedefective.

MOTOR TOO BIG [3]The motor connected to the system is too big forAMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102does not match the motor used.

MOTOR TOO SMALL [4]The motor connected to the system is too small forAMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102does not match the motor used.

TIME OUT [5]AMA fails because of noisy measuring signals. Try tostart AMA all over a number of times, until AMA iscarried out. Please note that repeated AMA runs mayheat the motor to a level where the stator resistanceRS is increased. In most cases, however, this is notcritical.

INTERRUPTED BY USER [6]AMA has been interrupted by the user.

INTERNAL FAULT [7]An internal fault has occurred in the VLT AFD.Contact your Danfoss supplier.

LIMIT VALUE FAULT [8]The parameter values found for the motor are out-side the acceptable range within which the VLTAFD is able to work.

MOTOR ROTATES [9]The motor shaft rotates. Make sure that the load isnot able to make the motor shaft rotate. Then startAMA all over.


WARNING/ALARM 18HPFB bus timeout (HPFB TIMEOUT)There is no serial communication with the commu-nication option card of the VLT AFD.The warning will only be enabled if parameter 804Bus time interval function has been set to anythingbut OFF. If parameter 804 Bus time interval functionhas been set to Stop and trip, the VLT AFD will firstgive off an alarm, then ramp down and finally tripwhile giving off an alarm.Parameter 803 Bus time interval could possibly beincreased.

WARNING 19Fault in the EEprom on the power card(EE ERROR POWER)There is a fault on the power card EEPROM. TheVLT AFD will continue to function, but is likely to failat the next power-up. Contact your Danfosssupplier.

WARNING 20Fault in the EEprom on the control card(EE ERROR CONTROL)There is a fault in the EEPROM on the control card.The VLT AFD will continue to function, but is likely tofail at the next power-up. Contact your Danfosssupplier.

ALARM: 22Auto-optimisation not OK(AMA FAULT)A fault has been found during automatic motoradaptation. The text shown in the display indicates afault message.

NOTE:AMA can only be carried out if there are noalarms during tuning.

CHECK 103, 105 [0]Parameter 103 or 105 has a wrong setting. Correctthe setting and start AMA all over.

LOW P.105 [1]The motor is too small for AMA to be carried out. IfAMA is to be enabled, the rated motor current(parameter 105) must be higher than 35% of the ratedoutput current of the VLT AFD.


VLT® 5000 AQUA



ALARM 29Heat sink temperature too high(HEAT SINK OVER TEMP.):If the enclosure is Chassis or NEMA 1, the cut-outtemperature of the heat-sink is 90°C. If NEMA 12 isused, the cut-out temperature is 80°C.The tolerance is ± 5°C. The temperature fault cannotbe reset, until the temperature of the heat-sink isbelow 60°C.The fault could be the following:- Ambient temperature too high- Too long motor cable- Too high switching frequency.

ALARM: 30Motor phase U missing(MISSING MOT.PHASE U):Motor phase U between VLT AFD and motor is mis-sing.Turn off the VLT AFD and check motor phase U.

ALARM: 31Motor phase V missing(MISSING MOT.PHASE V):Motor phase V between VLT AFD and motor is mis-sing.Turn off the VLT AFD and check motor phase V.

ALARM: 32Motor phase W missing(MISSING MOT.PHASE U):Motor phase W between VLT AFD and motor is mis-sing.Turn off the VLT AFD and check motor phase W.

WARNING/ALARM: 34HPFB communication fault(HPFB COMM. FAULT)The serial communication on the communication op-tion card is not working.

ALARM: 37Inverter fault (GATE DRIVE FAULT):IGBT or the power card is defective. Contact yourDanfoss supplier.

Auto-optimisation warnings 39-42Automatic motor adaptation has stopped, since someparameters have probably been set wrongly, or the motorused in too big/small for AMA to be carried out.A choice must thus be made by pressing [CHANGE DATA]and choosing ‘Continue’ + [OK] or ‘Stop’ + [OK].If parameters need to be changed, select ‘Stop’; start upAMA all over.

WARNING: 39CHECK PAR. 104, 106Parameters 104 Motor frequency fM,N, or 106 Rated motorspeed nM,N, have probably not been set correctly. Checkthe setting and select ‘Continue’ or [STOP].

WARNING: 40CHECK PAR. 103, 105Parameter 103 Motor voltage, UM,N or 105 Motor current,IM,N has not been set correctly. Correct the setting andrestart AMA.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA


WARNING: 41MOTOR TOO BIG (MOTOR TOO BIG)The motor used is probably too big for AMA to becarried out. The setting in parameter 102 Motorpower, PM,N may not match the motor. Check themotor and choose ‘Continue’ or [STOP].

WARNING: 42MOTOR TOO SMALL (MOTOR TOO SMALL)The motor used is probably too small for AMA to becarried out. The setting in parameter 102 Motorpower, PM,N may not match the motor. Check themotor and select ‘Continue’ or [STOP].

ALARM: 60Safety stop (EXTERNAL FAULT)Terminal 27 (parameter 304 Digital inputs) has beenprogrammed for a Safety interlock [3] and is a logic ‘0’.

WARNING: 61Output frequency low (FOUT < FLOW)The output frequency is lower than parameter 223Warning: Low frequency, fLOW.

WARNING: 62Output frequency high (FOUT > FHIGH)The output frequency is higher than parameter 224Warning: High frequency, fHIGH.

WARNING/ALARM: 63Output current low (I MOTOR < I LOW)The output current is lower than parameter 221Warning: Low current, ILOW. Select the requiredfunction in parameter 409 Function in case of no load.

WARNING: 64Output current high (I MOTOR > I HIGH)The output current is higher than parameter 222Warning: High current, IHIGH.

WARNING: 65Feedback low (FEEDBACK < FDB LOW)The resulting feedback value is lower than parame-ter 227 Warning: Low feedback, FBLOW.

WARNING: 66Feedback high (FEEDBACK > FDB HIGH)The resulting feedback value is higher than parame-ter 228 Warning: High feedback, FBHIGH.

WARNING: 67Remote reference low(REF. < REF LOW)The remote reference is lower than parameter 225Warning: Low reference, REFLOW.

WARNING: 68Remote reference high(REF. > REF HIGH)The remote reference is higher than parameter 226Warning: High reference, REFHIGH.

WARNING: 69Temperature auto derate(TEMP.AUTO DERATE)The heat sink temperature has exceeded themaximum value and the auto derating function (par.411) is active. Warning: Temp. Auto derate.

WARNING: 99Unknown fault (UNKNOWN ALARM)An unknown fault has occurred which the software isnot able to handle.Contact your Danfoss supplier.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Aggressive environmentsIn common with all electronic equipment, a VLTAFD contains a large number of mechanical andelectronic components, all of which are vulnerableto environmental effects to some extent.

The VLT AFD should not therefore beinstalled in environments with airbornliquids, particles or gasses capable ofaffecting and damaging the elec-

tronic components. Failure to take the necessaryprotective measures increases the risk of stoppages,thus reducing the life of the VLT AFD.

Liquids can be carried through the air andcondense in the VLT AFD. In addition to this, liquidsmay cause corrosion of components and metalparts.Steam, oil and salt water may cause corrosion ofcomponents and metal parts.In such environments, equipment with enclosurerating NEMA 12 is recommended.

Airborne particles such as dust particles may causemechanical, electrical or thermal failure in the VLTAFD.A typical indicator of excessive levels of airborneparticles is dust particles around the VLT AFD fan.In very dusty environments, equipment withenclosure rating NEMA 12 or a cabinet for Chassis/NEMA 1 equipment is recommended.

Calculation of resulting referenceThe calculation made below gives the resultingreference when parameter 210 Reference type isprogrammed for Sum [0] and Relative [1],respectively.

External reference is the sum of references from terminals53, 54, 60 and serial communication. The sum of thesecan never exceed parameter 205 Max. reference.External reference can be calculated as follows:

Res. ref. =(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Par. 211-214 Preset ref.

+ External ref. + Par. 204 Min. ref. + Par. 418/419 Setpoint100

External reference x Par. 211-214 Preset ref.

Par. 210 Reference type is programmed = Sum [0].

Ext. ref. =Par. 310 Term. 53 Max. scaling - Par. 309 Term. 53 Min. scaling

(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Ana. signal Term. 53 [V]+

Par. 313 Term. 54 Max. scaling - Par. 312 Term. 54 Min. scaling

(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Ana. signal Term. 54 [V]+

Par. 316 Term. 60 Max. scaling - Par. 315 Term. 60 Min. scaling

(Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.) x Par. 314 Term. 60 [mA]+

serial com. reference x (Par. 205 Max. ref. - Par. 204 Min. ref.)

16384 (4000 Hex)

Par. 210 Reference type is programmed = Relative [1].

+ Par. 204 Min. ref. + Par. 418/419 Setpoint (only in closed loop)Res. ref. =100

(only in closed loop)

In environments with high temperatures and humidity,corrosive gases such as sulphur, nitrogen and chlorinecompounds will cause chemical processes on the VLTAFD components. Such chemical reactions will rapidlyaffect and damage the electronic components.

In such environments, it is recommended thatequipment is mounted in a cabinet with fresh air ventila-tion, keeping aggressive gases away from the VLT AFD.

NOTE!Mounting VLT AFD in aggressive environmentswill increase the risk of stoppages and

furthermore considerably reduce the life of the drive.

Before the installation of the VLT AFD, the ambient airshould be checked for liquids, particles and gasses.This may be done by observing existing installations inthis environment. Typical indicators of harmful airborneliquids are water or oil on metal parts, or corrosion ofmetal parts.

Excessive dust particle levels are often found on installa-tion cabinets and existing electrical installations.One indicator of aggressive airborn gasses is blackeningof copper rails and cable ends on existing installations.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

Galvanic isolation

Galvanic isolation (PELV)PELV offers protection by way of extra low voltage.Protection against electric shock is considered to beensured when the electrical supply is of the PELVtype and the installation is made as described inlocal/national regulations on PELV supplies.

In VLT 5000 AQUA all control terminals as well asterminals 1-3 (AUX relay) are supplied from or inconnection with extra low voltage (PELV).

Galvanic (ensured) isolation is obtained by fulfillingrequirements concerning higher isolation and byproviding the relevant creapage/clearance distances.These requirements are described in the EN 50178standard.For additional information on PELV see RFI switching.

The components that make up the electrical isolation,as described below, also comply with the require-ments concerning higher isolation and the relevanttest as described in EN 50178.The galvanic isolation can be shown in three locations(see drawing below), namely:

1. Power supply (SMPS) incl. signal isolation ofUDC,indicating the intermediate current voltage.

2. Gate drive that runs the IGTBs (triggertransformers/opto-couplers).

3. Current transducers (Hall effect currenttransducers).

Ground leakage currentGround leakage current is primarily caused by thecapacitance between motor phases and the motorcable shield. See drawing on the following page.The size of the leakage current to the grounddepends on the following factors, in order of priority:1. Length of motor cable2. Motor cable with or without shield3. Switching frequency4. RFI filter used or not5. Motor grounded on site or not

The leakage current is of importance to safety duringhandling/operation of the AFD if (by mistake) theAFD has not been grounded.

NOTE: RCDSince the leakage current is > 3.5 mA,reinforced grounding must be established,

which is required if EN 50178 is to be complied with.Never use ELCB relays (type A) that are not suitablefor DC fault currents from three-phase rectifierloads.

If ELCB relays are used, they must be:- Suitable for protecting equipment with a direct

current content (DC) in the fault current(3-phase bridge rectifier)

- Suitable for power-up with short pulse-shapedcharging current to ground

- Suitable for a high leakage current (300 mA)


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Extreme running conditionsShort circuitVLT 5000 AQUA is protected against short circuitsby means of current measurement in each of thethree motor phases. A short circuit between twooutput phases will cause an overcurrent in theinverter. However, each transistor of the inverter willbe turned off individually when the short circuitcurrent exceedsthe permitted value.

After 5-10 ms the driver card turns off the inverterand the AFD will display a fault code, althoughdepending on impedance and motor frequency.

Ground faultThe inverter cuts out within 100 ms in case of anground fault on a motor phase, although dependingon impedance and motor frequency.

Switching on the outputSwitching on the output between the motor and theAFD is fully permitted. It is not possible to damageVLT 5000 AQUA in any way by switching on theoutput. However, fault messages may appear.

Motor-generated overvoltageThe voltage in the intermediate circuit is increasedwhen the motor acts as a generator. This occurs intwo cases:1. The load drives the motor (at constant output

frequency from the AFD), i.e. the load generatesenergy.

2. During deceleration ("ramp-down") if the momentof inertia is high, the load is low and the ramp-down time is too short for the energy to bedissipated as a loss in the VLT AFD, the motorand the installation.

The control unit attempts to correct the ramp if possible.The inverter turns off to protect the transistors and theintermediate circuit capacitors when a certain voltage levelis reached.

Line drop-outDuring a line drop-out, VLT 5000 AQUA continues untilthe intermediate circuit voltage drops below the minimumstop level, which is typically 15% below VLT 5000 AQUA'slowest rated supply voltage.

The time before the inverter stops depends on the linevoltage before the drop-out and on the motor load.

Static overloadWhen VLT 5000 AQUA is overloaded (the current limit inparameter 215 Current limit, ILIM has been reached), thecontrols will reduce the output frequency in an attempt toreduce the load.If the overload is excessive, a current may occur thatmakes the VLT AFD cut out after approx. 1.5 sec.

Operation within the current limit can be limited in time (0-60 s) in parameter 412 Trip delay overcurrent, ILIM.

Leakage currents to ground

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

VLT 5008-5027 200 V, VLT 5016-5062 400 VCable Line Peaklength voltage Rise time voltage165 feet 380 V 0.1 µsec. 900 V495 feet 380 V 0.2 µsec. 1000 V

VLT5075-5300 380-460V, 5042-5062 200-240VCable Line Peaklength voltage Rise time voltage44 feet 460 V 670 V/µsec. 815 V66 feet 460 V 620 V/µsec. 915 V

VLT5350 - 5600 380-460VCable Line Peaklength voltage Rise time voltage66 feet 460 V 620 V/µsec. 760 V

Switching on the inputSwitching on the input depends on the line voltage inquestion.The table below states the waiting time between cut-ins.

Line voltage 380 V 415 V 460 VWaiting time 48 s 65 s 89 s

Typical values for the rise time and peak voltage UPEAK

measured on the motor terminals between two phases:

VLT 5006 200 V, VLT 5006-5011 400 VCable Line Peaklength voltage Rise time voltage165 feet 380 V 0.3 µsec. 850 V165 feet 460 V 0.4 µsec. 950 V495 feet 380 V 1.2 µsec. 1000 V495 feet 460 V 1.3 µsec. 1300 V

Peak voltage on motorWhen a transistor in the inverter is opened, thevoltage across the motor increases by a dV/dt ratiothat depends on:- the motor cable (type, cross-section, length

shielded/armored or unshielded/unarmored)- inductance

The natural induction causes an overshot UPEAK in themotor voltage before it stabilises itself at a level whichdepends on the voltage in the intermediate circuit.The rise time and the peak voltage UPEAK affect theservice life of the motor. If the peak voltage is toohigh, motors without phase coil insulation are theones that will primarily be affected. If the motor cableis short (a few feet), the rise time and peak voltage arelower.If the motor cable is long (333 feet), the rise timeand peak voltage will increase.

If very small motors are used without phase coilinsulation, it is recommended to fit a LC filter after theAFD.

Acoustic noiseThe acoustic interference from the AFD comes fromtwo sources:1. DC intermediate circuit coils2. Integral fan.

Below are the typical values measured at a distanceof 3 feet from the unit at full load:

VLT 5006 200 V, VLT 5006-5011 400 VNEMA 1 units: 50 dB(A)NEMA 12 units: 62 dB(A)

VLT 5008-5027 200 V, VLT 5016-5062 400 V

NEMA 1 units: 61 dB(A)NEMA 12 units: 66 dB(A)

VLT 5042-5062 200-240 VNEMA 1 units: 70 dB(A)NEMA 12 units: 65 dB(A)

VLT 5075-5300 380-460 VNEMA 1 units: 70 dB(A)NEMA 12 units: 75 dB(A)


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Derating for ambient temperatureThe ambient temperature (TAMB,MAX) is the maximumtemperature allowed. The average (TAMB,AVG) measuredover 24 hours must be at least 5ºC lower.If VLT 5000 AQUA is operated at temperaturesabove 45 ºC, a derating of the continuous outputcurrent is necessary.

Derating for air pressureBelow 3300 feet altitude no derating is necessary.

Above 3300 feet the ambient temperature (TAMB) ormax. output current (IVLT,MAX) must be derated inaccordance with the diagram below:

1) Derating of output current versus altitude atTAMB = max. 45°C

2) Derating of max. TAMB versus altitude at 100%output current.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

Derating for running at low speedWhen a centrifugal pump or a fan is controlled by aVLT 5000 AQUA AFD, it is not necessary to reducethe output current at low speed because the loadcharacterstic of the centrifugal pumps/fans,automatically ensures the necessary reduction.

Derating for long motor cables or cables withlarger cross-sectionVLT 5000 AQUA has been tested using 1000 feetunshielded/unarmoured cable and 4950 feetshielded/armored cable.

VLT 5000 AQUA has been designed to work using amotor cable with a rated cross-section. If a cablewith a larger cross-section is to be used, it is recom-mended to reduce the output current by 5% for everystep the cross-section is increased.(Increased cable cross-section leads to increasedcapacity to ground, and thus an increased groundleakage current).

Switching frequency [kHz] Min. Max. Fact.VLT 5006-5032, 200 V 3.0 14.0 4.5VLT 5006-5011, 460 V 3.0 10.0 4.5VLT 5016-5062, 460 V 3.0 14.0 4.5VLT 5042-5062, 200 V 3.0 4.5 4.5VLT 5075-5600, 460 V 3.0 4.5 4.5

Vibration and shockVLT 5000 AQUA has been tested according to aprocedure based on the following standards:

IEC 68-2-6: Vibration (sinusoidal) - 1970IEC 68-2-34: Random vibration broad-band

- general requirementsIEC 68-2-35: Random vibration broad-band

- high reproducibilityIEC 68-2-36: Random vibration broad-band

- medium reproducibility

VLT 5000 AQUA complies with requirements thatcorrespond to conditions when the unit is mountedon the walls and floors of production premises, aswell as in panels bolted to walls or floors.

Motor thermal protectionThe motor temperature is calculated on the basis ofmotor current, output frequency and time. Seeparameter 117, Motor thermal protection.

Air humidityVLT 5000 AQUA has been designed to meet the IEC68-2-3 standard, EN 50178 pkt. 9.4.2.2/DIN 40040,class E, at 40°C.See specifications under General technical data.

Derating for high switching frequencyA higher switching frequency (to be set in parameter407 Switching frequency) leads to higher losses in theelectronics of the VLT AFD.

VLT 5000 AQUA has a pulse pattern in which it ispossible to set the switching frequency from 3.0-10.0/14.0 kHz.The VLT AFD will automatically derate the rated out-put current IVLT,N, when the switching frequencyexceeds 4.5 kHz.In both cases, the reduction is carried out linearly,down to 60% of IVLT,N.The table gives the min., max. and factory-setswitching frequencies for VLT 5000 AQUA units.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


EfficiencyTo reduce energy consumption it is very important tooptimize the efficiency of a system. The efficiency ofeach single element in the system should be as highas possible.

Efficiency of VLT 5000 AQUA (ηVLT)The load on the AFD has little effect on its efficiency.In general, the efficiency is the same at the ratedmotor frequency fM,N, regardless of whether the mo-tor supplies 100% of the rated shaft torque or only75%, i.e. in case of part loads.

The efficiency declines a little when the switchingfrequency is set to a value of above 4 kHz (parameter407 Switching frequency). The rate of efficiency willalso be slightly reduced if the line voltage is 460 V, orif the motor cable is longer than 100 feet.

Efficiency of the motor (ηMOTOR)The efficiency of a motor connected to the AFDdepends on the sine shape of the current. In gene-ral, the efficiency is just as good as with line opera-tion. The efficiency of the motor depends on the typeof motor.

In the range of 75-100% of the rated torque, theefficiency of the motor is practically constant, bothwhen it is controlled by the AFD and when it runsdirectly on line.

In small motors, the influence from the U/f characteristicon efficiency is marginal; however, in motors from 15 HPand up, the advantages are significant.

In general, the switching frequency does not affect theefficiency of small motors. Motors from 15 HP and uphave their efficiency improved (1-2%). This is because thesine shape of the motor current is almost perfect at highswitching frequency.

Efficiency of the system (ηSYSTEM)To calculate the system efficiency, the efficiency of VLT5000 AQUA (ηVLT) is multiplied by the efficiency of the mo-tor (ηMOTOR):ηSYSTEM = ηVLT x ηMOTOR

Based on the graph outlined above, it is possible tocalculate the system efficiency at different speeds.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

The voltage distortion on the line supply depends onthe size of the harmonic currents multiplied by the lineimpedance for the frequency in question.The total voltage distortion THD is calculated on thebasis of the individual voltage harmonics using thefollowing formula:

THD% = U2 + U2 + ..... U2

Some of the harmonic currents might disturbcommunication equipment connected to the sametransformer or cause resonance in connection withpower-factor correction batteries. VLT 5000 AQUAhas been designed in accordance with the followingstandards:

- IEC 1000-3-4- IEEE 519-1992- IEC 22G/WG4- EN 50178- VDE 160, 5.3.1.1.2

5 + U7

+ ..... UN

Line supply interference/harmonicsAn AFD takes up a non-sinusoidal current from line,which increases the input current IRMS. A non-sinusoidal current can be transformed by means ofa Fourier analysis and split up into sine wavecurrents with different frequencies, i.e. differentharmonic currents IN with 50 Hz as the basicfrequency:

Harmonic currents I1 I5 I7Hz 50 Hz 250 Hz 350 Hz

The harmonics do not affect the power consumptiondirectly, but increase the heat losses in the installation(transformer, cables). Consequently, in plants with arather high percentage of rectifier load, it is importantto maintain harmonic currents at a low level to avoidoverload of the transformer and high temperature inthe cables.

Harmonic currents compared to the RMS inputcurrent:

Input currentIRMS 1.0I1 0.9I5 0.4I7 0.3I11-49 < 0.1

To ensure low, harmonic currents, VLT 5000 AQUAhas intermediate circuit coils as standard. Thisnormally reduces the input current IRMS by 40%.

Power factor = =

Power factorThe power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.

The power factor for 3-phase control

=

The power factor indicates the extent to which theAFD imposes a load on the line supply.The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for thesame HP performance.In addition, a high power factor indicates that thedifferent harmonic currents are low.

3 x U x I1 x cos ϕ1

3 x U x IRMS

IRMS

I1

IRMS

IRMS = I12 + I52 + I72 + . . . + In2

I1 x cos ϕ 1 since cos ϕ = 1

(UN% of U)


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Digital inputs:The digital inputs can be used for controlling variousfunctions of the VLT AFD.

Digital outputs:There are four digital outputs, two of which activate arelay switch. The outputs are able to supply a 24 V DC(max. 40 mA) signal.

fJOG

The output frequency from the VLT AFD transmitted tothe motor when the jog function is activated (via digitalterminals or serial communication).

fMThe output frequency from the VLT AFD transmitted tothe motor.

fM,N

The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).

fMAX

Maximum output frequency transmitted to the motor.

fMIN

Minimum output frequency transmitted to the motor.

IMThe current transmitted to the motor.

IM,N

The rated motor current (nameplate data).

Initializing:If initializing is carried out (see parameter 620 Operatingmode), the VLT AFD returns to the factory setting.

IVLT,MAX

The maximum output current.

IVLT,N

The rated output current supplied by the VLT AFD.

LCP:The control panel, which makes up a complete interfacefor control and programming of VLT 5000 AQUA.The control panel is detachable and may, as an alterna-tive, be installed up to 10 feet away from the VLT AFD,i.e. in a front panel, by means of the installation kit option.

DefinitionsDefinitions are given in alphabetical order.

Analog inputs:The analog inputs can be used for controlling variousfunctions of the VLT AFD. There are two types ofanaloge inputs:Current input, 0-20 mAVoltage input, 0-10 V DC.

Analog ref.A signal transmitted to input 53, 54 or 60. Can bevoltage or current.

Analog outputs:There are two analog outputs, which are able tosupply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or a digitalsignal.

Automatic motor adjustment, AMA:Automatic motor adjustment algorithm, whichdetermines the electrical parameters for theconnected motor, at standstill.

AWG:Means American Wire Gauge, i.e. the Americanmeasuring unit for cable cross-section.

Control command:By means of the control unit and the digital inputs, itis possible to start and stop the connected motor.Functions are divided into two groups, with thefollowing priorities:

Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coastingstop, DC braking, Stop and the [OFF/STOP] key.

Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Startreversing, Jog and Freeze output

Group 1 functions are called Start-disablecommands. The difference between group 1 andgroup 2 is that in group 1 all stop signals must becancelled for the motor to start. The motor can thenbe started by means of a single start signal in group2.A stop command given as a group 1 commandresults in the display indication STOP.A missing stop command given as a group 2command results in the display indication STAND BY.

VLT® 5000 AQUA


All

abo

utV

LT 5

000

AQ

UA

LSB:Least significant bit.Used in serial communication.

MCM:Stands for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuringunit for cable cross-section.

MSB:Most significant bit.Used in serial communication.

nM,N

The rated motor speed (nameplate data).

ηVLT

The efficiency of the VLT AFD is defined as the ratiobetween the power output and the power input.

On-line/off-line parameters:On-line parameters are activated immediately afterthe data value is changed. Off-line parameters are notactivated until OK has been entered on the controlunit.

PID:The PID regulator maintains the desired speed (press-ure, temperature, etc.) by adjusting the output fre-quency to match the varying load.

PM,N

The rated power delivered by the motor (nameplatedata).

Preset ref.A permanently defined reference, which can be setfrom -100% to +100% of the reference range. Thereare four preset references, which can be selected viathe digital terminals.

RefMAX

The maximum value which the reference signal mayhave. Set in parameter 205 Maximum reference,RefMAX.

RefMIN

The smallest value which the reference signal mayhave. Set in parameter 204 Minimum reference,RefMIN.

Setup:There are four Setups, in which it is possible to saveparameter settings. It is possible to change betweenthe four parameter Setups and to edit one Setup,while another Setup is active.

Start-disable command:A stop command that belongs to group 1 of thecontrol commands - see this group.

Stop command:See Control commands.

Thermistor:A temperature-dependent resistor placed where thetemperature is to be monitored (VLT or motor).

Trip:A state which occurs in different situations, e.g. if theVLT AFD is subjected to an overtemperature. A tripcan be cancelled by pressing reset or, in some cases,automatically.

Trip locked:A state which occurs in different situations, e.g. if theVLT AFD is subject to an overtemperature. A lockedtrip can be cancelled by cutting off line and restartingthe VLT AFD.

UM

The voltage transmitted to the motor.

UM,N

The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).

UVLT, MAX

The maximum output voltage.

VT characteristics:Variable torque characteristics, used for pumps andfans.


VLT® 5000 AQUA


PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup

# description during operation

001 LanguageLanguageLanguageLanguageLanguage English Yes No 0 5

002 Active SetupActive SetupActive SetupActive SetupActive Setup Setup 1 Yes No 0 5

003 Copying of SetupsCopying of SetupsCopying of SetupsCopying of SetupsCopying of Setups No copying No No 0 5

004 LCP copyLCP copyLCP copyLCP copyLCP copy No copying No No 0 5

005 Max value of userMax value of userMax value of userMax value of userMax value of user-defined r-defined r-defined r-defined r-defined readouteadouteadouteadouteadout 100.00 0 - 999.999,99 Yes Yes -2 4

006 Unit for userUnit for userUnit for userUnit for userUnit for user-defined r-defined r-defined r-defined r-defined readouteadouteadouteadouteadout No unit Yes Yes 0 5

007 Big display rBig display rBig display rBig display rBig display readouteadouteadouteadouteadout Frequency, % of max. Yes Yes 0 5

008 Small display rSmall display rSmall display rSmall display rSmall display readout 1.1eadout 1.1eadout 1.1eadout 1.1eadout 1.1 Reference , Unit Yes Yes 0 5

009 Small display rSmall display rSmall display rSmall display rSmall display readout 1.2eadout 1.2eadout 1.2eadout 1.2eadout 1.2 Motor current, A Yes Yes 0 5

010 Small display rSmall display rSmall display rSmall display rSmall display readout 1.3eadout 1.3eadout 1.3eadout 1.3eadout 1.3 Power, HP Yes Yes 0 5

011 Unit of local rUnit of local rUnit of local rUnit of local rUnit of local referefereferefereferenceenceenceenceence Hz Yes Yes 0 5

012 Hand start on LCPHand start on LCPHand start on LCPHand start on LCPHand start on LCP Enable Yes Yes 0 5

013 OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/STOPSTOPSTOPSTOPSTOP on LCP on LCP on LCP on LCP on LCP Enable Yes Yes 0 5

014 Auto start on LCPAuto start on LCPAuto start on LCPAuto start on LCPAuto start on LCP Enable Yes Yes 0 5

015 Reset on LCPReset on LCPReset on LCPReset on LCPReset on LCP Enable Yes Yes 0 5

016 Lock for data changeLock for data changeLock for data changeLock for data changeLock for data change Not locked Yes Yes 0 5

017 Operating state at powerOperating state at powerOperating state at powerOperating state at powerOperating state at power-up,-up,-up,-up,-up, Auto restart Yes Yes 0 5

local contrlocal contrlocal contrlocal contrlocal contrololololol

100 ConfigurationConfigurationConfigurationConfigurationConfiguration Open loop No Yes 0 5

101 TTTTTorororororque characteristicsque characteristicsque characteristicsque characteristicsque characteristics Automatic Energy Optimisation No Yes 0 5

102 Motor powerMotor powerMotor powerMotor powerMotor power, P, P, P, P, PM,NM,NM,NM,NM,N Depends on the unit 5 - 600 HP No Yes 1 6

103 Motor voltage, UMotor voltage, UMotor voltage, UMotor voltage, UMotor voltage, UM,NM,NM,NM,NM,N Depends on the unit 208/460 V No Yes 0 6

104 Motor frMotor frMotor frMotor frMotor frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency, f, f, f, f, fM,NM,NM,NM,NM,N 60 Hz 24-1000 Hz No Yes 0 6

105 Motor currMotor currMotor currMotor currMotor current, Ient, Ient, Ient, Ient, IM,NM,NM,NM,NM,N Depends on the unit 0.01 - IVLT,MAX No Yes -2 7

106 Rated motor speed, nRated motor speed, nRated motor speed, nRated motor speed, nRated motor speed, nM,NM,NM,NM,NM,N Depends on 100-60000 rpm No Yes 0 6

par. 102 Motor power

107 Automatic motor adaptation, AMAAutomatic motor adaptation, AMAAutomatic motor adaptation, AMAAutomatic motor adaptation, AMAAutomatic motor adaptation, AMA Optimisation disable No No 0 5

108 Start voltage of parallel motorsStart voltage of parallel motorsStart voltage of parallel motorsStart voltage of parallel motorsStart voltage of parallel motors Depends on par. 103 0.0 - par. 103 Yes Yes -1 6

109 Resonance dampeningResonance dampeningResonance dampeningResonance dampeningResonance dampening 100 % 0 - 500 % Yes Yes 0 6

110 High brake-away torHigh brake-away torHigh brake-away torHigh brake-away torHigh brake-away torquequequequeque 0.0 sec. 0.0 - 0.5 sec. Yes Yes -1 5

111 Start delayStart delayStart delayStart delayStart delay 0.0 sec. 0.0 - 120.0 sec. Yes Yes -1 6

112 Motor prMotor prMotor prMotor prMotor preheatereheatereheatereheatereheater Disable Yes Yes 0 5

113 Motor prMotor prMotor prMotor prMotor preheater DC curreheater DC curreheater DC curreheater DC curreheater DC currententententent 50 % 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6

114 DC braking currDC braking currDC braking currDC braking currDC braking currententententent 50 % 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6

115 DC braking timeDC braking timeDC braking timeDC braking timeDC braking time OFF 0.0 - 60.0 sec. Yes Yes -1 6

116 DC brake cut-in frDC brake cut-in frDC brake cut-in frDC brake cut-in frDC brake cut-in frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency OFF 0.0-par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6

117 Motor thermal prMotor thermal prMotor thermal prMotor thermal prMotor thermal protectionotectionotectionotectionotection ETR trip 1 Yes Yes 0 5

Datatype

Factory settings

Conversionindex

VLT® 5000 AQUA




200 Output frOutput frOutput frOutput frOutput frequency rangeequency rangeequency rangeequency rangeequency range 0 -120 Hz 0 - 1000 Hz No Yes

201 Output frOutput frOutput frOutput frOutput frequency low limit, fequency low limit, fequency low limit, fequency low limit, fequency low limit, fMINMINMINMINMIN 0.0 Hz 0.0 - fMAX Yes Yes

202 Output frOutput frOutput frOutput frOutput frequency high limit, fequency high limit, fequency high limit, fequency high limit, fequency high limit, fMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX 60 Hz fMIN - par. 200 Yes Yes

203 ReferReferReferReferReference siteence siteence siteence siteence site Hand/Auto linked reference Yes Yes

204 Minimum rMinimum rMinimum rMinimum rMinimum referefereferefereference, Refence, Refence, Refence, Refence, RefMINMINMINMINMIN 0.000 0.000-par. 100 Yes Yes

205 Maximum rMaximum rMaximum rMaximum rMaximum referefereferefereference, Refence, Refence, Refence, Refence, RefMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX 60 Hz par. 100-999.999,999 Yes Yes

206 Ramp-up timeRamp-up timeRamp-up timeRamp-up timeRamp-up time Depends on the unit 1 - 3600 Yes Yes

207 Ramp-down timeRamp-down timeRamp-down timeRamp-down timeRamp-down time Depends on the unit 1 - 3600 Yes Yes

208 Automatic ramp-up/downAutomatic ramp-up/downAutomatic ramp-up/downAutomatic ramp-up/downAutomatic ramp-up/down Enable Yes Yes

209 Jog frJog frJog frJog frJog frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency 10.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 100 Yes Yes

210 ReferReferReferReferReference typeence typeence typeence typeence type External/Preset Yes Yes

211 PrPrPrPrPreset reset reset reset reset referefereferefereference 1ence 1ence 1ence 1ence 1 0.00 % -100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes



214 PrPrPrPrPreset reset reset reset reset referefereferefereference 4ence 4ence 4ence 4ence 4 0.00 % -100,00 - 100,00 % Yes Yes

215 CurrCurrCurrCurrCurrent limit, Ient limit, Ient limit, Ient limit, Ient limit, ILIMLIMLIMLIMLIM 1.0 x IVLT,N [A] 0,1-1,1 x IVLT,N [A] Yes Yes

216 FrFrFrFrFrequency bypass, bandwidthequency bypass, bandwidthequency bypass, bandwidthequency bypass, bandwidthequency bypass, bandwidth 0 Hz 0 - 100 Hz Yes Yes

217 FrFrFrFrFrequency bypass 1equency bypass 1equency bypass 1equency bypass 1equency bypass 1 120 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes




221 WWWWWarararararning: Low currning: Low currning: Low currning: Low currning: Low current, Ient, Ient, Ient, Ient, ILOWLOWLOWLOWLOW 0.0 A 0.0 - par. 222 Yes Yes

222 WWWWWarararararning: High currning: High currning: High currning: High currning: High current, Ient, Ient, Ient, Ient, IHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH IVLT,MAX Par. 221 - IVLT,MAX Yes Yes

223 WWWWWarararararning: Low frning: Low frning: Low frning: Low frning: Low frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency, f, f, f, f, fLOWLOWLOWLOWLOW 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 224 Yes Yes

224 WWWWWarararararning: High frning: High frning: High frning: High frning: High frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency, f, f, f, f, fHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH 120.0 Hz Par. 223 - par. 200/202 Yes Yes

225 WWWWWarararararning: Low rning: Low rning: Low rning: Low rning: Low referefereferefereference, Refence, Refence, Refence, Refence, RefLOWLOWLOWLOWLOW 0.0 Hz -999,999.999 - par. 226 Yes Yes

226 WWWWWarararararning: High rning: High rning: High rning: High rning: High referefereferefereference, Refence, Refence, Refence, Refence, RefHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH 50.0 Hz Par. 225 - 999,999.999 Yes Yes

227 WWWWWarararararning: Low feedback, FBning: Low feedback, FBning: Low feedback, FBning: Low feedback, FBning: Low feedback, FBLOWLOWLOWLOWLOW 0.000 -999,999.999 - par. 228 Yes Yes

228 WWWWWarararararning: High feedback, FBning: High feedback, FBning: High feedback, FBning: High feedback, FBning: High feedback, FBHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGHHIGH 100.000 Par. 227 - 999,999.999 Yes Yes

Data

type

5

6

6

5

4

4

7

7

5

6

5

3

3

3

3

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

4

4

4

4

Conversion

index

0

-1

-1

0

-3

-3

0

0

0

-1

0

-2

-2

-2

-2

-1

0

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-3

-3

-3

-3

Factory settings

Changes during operation:"Yes" means that the parameter can be changed,while the VLT AFD is in operation. "No" means thatthe VLT AFD must be stopped before a change canbe made.

4-Setup:"Yes" means that the parameter can be programmedindividually in each of the four setups, i.e. the sameparameter can have four different data values. "No"means that the data value will be the same in all foursetups.

Conversion index:This number refers to a conversion figure to be usedwhen writing or reading to or from a VLT AFD bymeans of serial communication.

Conversion index Conversion factor74 0.12 1001 100 1-1 0.1-2 0.01-3 0.001-4 0.0001

Data type:Data type shows the type and length of the telegram.Data type Description

3 Integer 16

4 Integer 32

5 Unsigned 8

6 Unsigned 16

7 Unsigned 32

9 Text string


VLT® 5000 AQUA


Data

type

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

6

5

6

5

6

6

5

6

6



300 TTTTTerminal 16 Digital inputerminal 16 Digital inputerminal 16 Digital inputerminal 16 Digital inputerminal 16 Digital input Reset Yes Yes

301 TTTTTerminal 17 Digital inputerminal 17 Digital inputerminal 17 Digital inputerminal 17 Digital inputerminal 17 Digital input No operation Yes Yes

302 TTTTTerminal 18 Digital inputerminal 18 Digital inputerminal 18 Digital inputerminal 18 Digital inputerminal 18 Digital input Start Yes Yes

303 TTTTTerminal 19 Digital inputerminal 19 Digital inputerminal 19 Digital inputerminal 19 Digital inputerminal 19 Digital input Reversing Yes Yes

304 TTTTTerminal 27 Digital inputerminal 27 Digital inputerminal 27 Digital inputerminal 27 Digital inputerminal 27 Digital input Safety interlock Yes Yes

305 TTTTTerminal 29 Digital inputerminal 29 Digital inputerminal 29 Digital inputerminal 29 Digital inputerminal 29 Digital input Jog Yes Yes



308 TTTTTerminal 53, analogerminal 53, analogerminal 53, analogerminal 53, analogerminal 53, analog

inputinputinputinputinput voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage No operation Yes Yes

309 TTTTTerminal 53, min. scalingerminal 53, min. scalingerminal 53, min. scalingerminal 53, min. scalingerminal 53, min. scaling 0.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes

310 TTTTTerminal 53, max. scalingerminal 53, max. scalingerminal 53, max. scalingerminal 53, max. scalingerminal 53, max. scaling 10.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes

311 TTTTTerminal 54, analogerminal 54, analogerminal 54, analogerminal 54, analogerminal 54, analog

inputinputinputinputinput voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage No operation Yes Yes

312 TTTTTerminal 54, min. scalingerminal 54, min. scalingerminal 54, min. scalingerminal 54, min. scalingerminal 54, min. scaling 0.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes

313 TTTTTerminal 54, max. scalingerminal 54, max. scalingerminal 54, max. scalingerminal 54, max. scalingerminal 54, max. scaling 10.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes

314 TTTTTerminal 60, analog inputerminal 60, analog inputerminal 60, analog inputerminal 60, analog inputerminal 60, analog input

currcurrcurrcurrcurrententententent Reference Yes Yes

315 TTTTTerminal 60, min. scalingerminal 60, min. scalingerminal 60, min. scalingerminal 60, min. scalingerminal 60, min. scaling 4.0 mA 0.0 - 20.0 mA Yes Yes

316 TTTTTerminal 60, max. scalingerminal 60, max. scalingerminal 60, max. scalingerminal 60, max. scalingerminal 60, max. scaling 20.0 mA 0.0 - 20.0 mA Yes Yes

317 TTTTTime outime outime outime outime out 10 sec. 1 - 99 sec. Yes Yes

318 Function after time outFunction after time outFunction after time outFunction after time outFunction after time out Off Yes Yes

319 TTTTTerminal 42, outputerminal 42, outputerminal 42, outputerminal 42, outputerminal 42, output 0 - IMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA Yes Yes

320 TTTTTerminal 42, output,erminal 42, output,erminal 42, output,erminal 42, output,erminal 42, output,

pulse scalingpulse scalingpulse scalingpulse scalingpulse scaling 5000 Hz 1 - 32000 Hz Yes Yes

321 TTTTTerminal 45, outputerminal 45, outputerminal 45, outputerminal 45, outputerminal 45, output 0 - fMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA Yes Yes

322 TTTTTerminal 45, output,erminal 45, output,erminal 45, output,erminal 45, output,erminal 45, output,

pulse scalingpulse scalingpulse scalingpulse scalingpulse scaling 5000 Hz 1 - 32000 Hz Yes Yes

323 Relay 1, output functionRelay 1, output functionRelay 1, output functionRelay 1, output functionRelay 1, output function No alarm Yes Yes

324 Relay 01, ON delayRelay 01, ON delayRelay 01, ON delayRelay 01, ON delayRelay 01, ON delay 0.00 sec. 0 - 600 sec. Yes Yes

325 Relay 01, OFF delayRelay 01, OFF delayRelay 01, OFF delayRelay 01, OFF delayRelay 01, OFF delay 2.00 sec. 0 - 600 sec. Yes Yes

326 Relay 2, output functionRelay 2, output functionRelay 2, output functionRelay 2, output functionRelay 2, output function Running Yes Yes

327 Pulse rPulse rPulse rPulse rPulse referefereferefereference,ence,ence,ence,ence, 5000 Hz Depends on Yes Yes

max. frmax. frmax. frmax. frmax. frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency input terminal

328 Pulse feedback, max. frPulse feedback, max. frPulse feedback, max. frPulse feedback, max. frPulse feedback, max. frequency equency equency equency equency 25000 Hz 0 - 65000 Hz Yes Yes

Conversion

index

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-1

-1

0

-1

-1

0

-4

-4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Factory settings

Changes during operation:"Yes" means that the parameter can be changed, whilethe VLT AFD is in operation. "No" means that the VLTAFD must be stopped before a change can be made.

4-Setup:"Yes" means that the parameter can be programmedindividually in each of the four setups, i.e. the same para-meter can have four different data values. "No" meansthat the data value will be the same in all four setups.

Conversion index:This number refers to a conversion figure to be usedwhen writing or reading to or from a VLT AFD by meansof serial communication.


Data type:Data type shows the type and length of the telegram.Data type Description

3 Integer 16

4 Integer 32

5 Unsigned 8

6 Unsigned 16

7 Unsigned 32

9 Text string

VLT® 5000 AQUA


Factory settings

Data

type

5

6

5

6

6

6

6

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

5

5

5

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

6

6

6

Conversion

index

0

0

-1

0

-1

-1

0

2

0

0

0

0

0

-3

-3

-1

0

0

-3

-3

0

0

-1

-2

-2

-2

-1

-2

PNU Parameter Parameter Factory setting Changes 4-Setup


400 Reset functionReset functionReset functionReset functionReset function Automatic x 20 Yes Yes

401 Automatic rAutomatic rAutomatic rAutomatic rAutomatic restart timeestart timeestart timeestart timeestart time 10 sec. 0 - 600 sec. Yes Yes

402 Flying startFlying startFlying startFlying startFlying start Enable Yes Yes

403 Sleep mode timerSleep mode timerSleep mode timerSleep mode timerSleep mode timer Off 0 - 300 sec. Yes Yes

404 Sleep frSleep frSleep frSleep frSleep frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency 0 Hz fMIN - Par. 405 Yes Yes

405 WWWWWake up frake up frake up frake up frake up frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency 60 Hz Par. 404 - fMAX Yes Yes

406 Boost setpointBoost setpointBoost setpointBoost setpointBoost setpoint 100% 1 - 200 % Yes Yes

407 Switching frSwitching frSwitching frSwitching frSwitching frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency Depends on the unit 3.0 - 14.0 kHz Yes Yes408 InterferInterferInterferInterferInterference rence rence rence rence reduction methodeduction methodeduction methodeduction methodeduction method ASFM Yes Yes

409 Function in case of no loadFunction in case of no loadFunction in case of no loadFunction in case of no loadFunction in case of no load Warning Yes Yes

410 Function at mais failurFunction at mais failurFunction at mais failurFunction at mais failurFunction at mais failureeeee Trip Yes Yes

411 Function at overtemperaturFunction at overtemperaturFunction at overtemperaturFunction at overtemperaturFunction at overtemperatureeeee Trip Yes Yes

412 TTTTTrip delay overrip delay overrip delay overrip delay overrip delay overcurrcurrcurrcurrcurrent, Ient, Ient, Ient, Ient, ILIMLIMLIMLIMLIM 60 sec 0 - 60 sec. Yes Yes

413 Minimum feedback, FBMinimum feedback, FBMinimum feedback, FBMinimum feedback, FBMinimum feedback, FBMINMINMINMINMIN 0.000 -999,999.999 - FBMIN Yes Yes

414 Maximum feedback, FBMaximum feedback, FBMaximum feedback, FBMaximum feedback, FBMaximum feedback, FBMAXMAXMAXMAXMAX 100.000 FBMIN - 999,999.999 Yes Yes

415 Units rUnits rUnits rUnits rUnits relating to closed loopelating to closed loopelating to closed loopelating to closed loopelating to closed loop % Yes Yes

416 Feedback conversionFeedback conversionFeedback conversionFeedback conversionFeedback conversion Linear Yes Yes

417 Feedback calculationFeedback calculationFeedback calculationFeedback calculationFeedback calculation Maximum Yes Yes

418 Setpoint 1Setpoint 1Setpoint 1Setpoint 1Setpoint 1 0.000 FBMIN - FBMAX Yes Yes

419 Setpoint 2Setpoint 2Setpoint 2Setpoint 2Setpoint 2 0.000 FBMIN - FBMAX Yes Yes

420 PID PID PID PID PID nnnnnormal/inverse contrormal/inverse contrormal/inverse contrormal/inverse contrormal/inverse contrololololol Normal Yes Yes

421 PID anti windupPID anti windupPID anti windupPID anti windupPID anti windup On Yes Yes

422 PID start-up frPID start-up frPID start-up frPID start-up frPID start-up frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency 0 Hz fMIN - fMAX

423 PID prPID prPID prPID prPID proportional gainoportional gainoportional gainoportional gainoportional gain 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 Yes Yes

424 PID start-up frPID start-up frPID start-up frPID start-up frPID start-up frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency Off 0.01 - 9999.00 s. (Off) Yes Yes

425 PID difPID difPID difPID difPID differferferferferentiation timeentiation timeentiation timeentiation timeentiation time Off 0.0 (Off) - 10.00 sec. Yes Yes

426 PID difPID difPID difPID difPID differferferferferentiator gainentiator gainentiator gainentiator gainentiator gain 5.0 5.0 - 50.0 Yes Yes

limitlimitlimitlimitlimit

427 PID lowpass filter timePID lowpass filter timePID lowpass filter timePID lowpass filter timePID lowpass filter time 0.01 0.01 - 10.00 Yes Yes


VLT® 5000 AQUA


The table below show the proposed layout for the group 500 parameters in the VLT® 5000 AQUA drive:

Proposed Old Description Comments

placement placement

500 500 Telegram Profile Selection of Telegram Profile: FD (Danfoss)

501 500 Address Range depends on selected telegram profile, the actual value for

each profile is stored when switching between the profiles, until

power off.

502 501 Baud rate Range depends on selected telegram profile, the actual value for

each profile is stored when switching between the profiles, until

power off.

503 502 Coast -

504 503 DC brake -

505 504 Start -

506 505 Reversing -

507 506 Setup select -

508 507 Preset ref. select -

509...532 511...534 Data Read-out.... -

533 535 Display test 1 -

534 536 Display test 2 -

535 537 Bus feedback 1 -

536 538 Bus feedback 2 -

555 509 Bus time interval FC feature

556 510 Bus time interval function FC feature

557...559 - Reserved for FC-bus FC Reserved for future expansions

560 - Override release time N2 Override time-out time

561...564 - Resserved for Metasys N2 N2 Reserved for future expansions

565...569 - Reserved Reserved for future expansions

VLT® 5000 AQUA




600 Operating data: Operating hoursOperating data: Operating hoursOperating data: Operating hoursOperating data: Operating hoursOperating data: Operating hours No No

601 Operating data: Hours runOperating data: Hours runOperating data: Hours runOperating data: Hours runOperating data: Hours run No No

602 Operating data: kWh counterOperating data: kWh counterOperating data: kWh counterOperating data: kWh counterOperating data: kWh counter No No

603 Operating data: No. of cut-insOperating data: No. of cut-insOperating data: No. of cut-insOperating data: No. of cut-insOperating data: No. of cut-ins No No

604 Operating data: No. of overtempsOperating data: No. of overtempsOperating data: No. of overtempsOperating data: No. of overtempsOperating data: No. of overtemps No No

605 Operating data: No. of overvoltagesOperating data: No. of overvoltagesOperating data: No. of overvoltagesOperating data: No. of overvoltagesOperating data: No. of overvoltages No No

606 Data log: Digital inputData log: Digital inputData log: Digital inputData log: Digital inputData log: Digital input No No

607 Data log: ContrData log: ContrData log: ContrData log: ContrData log: Control worol worol worol worol worddddd No No

608 Data log: Status worData log: Status worData log: Status worData log: Status worData log: Status worddddd No No

609 Data log: ReferData log: ReferData log: ReferData log: ReferData log: Referenceenceenceenceence No No

610 Data log: FeedbackData log: FeedbackData log: FeedbackData log: FeedbackData log: Feedback No No

611 Data log: Output frData log: Output frData log: Output frData log: Output frData log: Output frequencyequencyequencyequencyequency No No

612 Data log: Output voltageData log: Output voltageData log: Output voltageData log: Output voltageData log: Output voltage No No

613 Data log: Output currData log: Output currData log: Output currData log: Output currData log: Output currententententent No No

614 Data log: DC link voltageData log: DC link voltageData log: DC link voltageData log: DC link voltageData log: DC link voltage No No

615 Fault log: ErrFault log: ErrFault log: ErrFault log: ErrFault log: Error codeor codeor codeor codeor code No No

616 Fault log: TFault log: TFault log: TFault log: TFault log: Timeimeimeimeime No No

617 Fault log: VFault log: VFault log: VFault log: VFault log: Valuealuealuealuealue No No

618 Reset of kWh counterReset of kWh counterReset of kWh counterReset of kWh counterReset of kWh counter No reset Yes No

619 Reset of hours-run counterReset of hours-run counterReset of hours-run counterReset of hours-run counterReset of hours-run counter No reset Yes No

620 Operating modeOperating modeOperating modeOperating modeOperating mode Normal function Yes No

621 Nameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit typeNameplate: Unit type No No

622 Nameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power component No No

623 Nameplate: VLNameplate: VLNameplate: VLNameplate: VLNameplate: VLT orT orT orT orT ordering no.dering no.dering no.dering no.dering no. No No

624 Nameplate: SoftwarNameplate: SoftwarNameplate: SoftwarNameplate: SoftwarNameplate: Software version no.e version no.e version no.e version no.e version no. No No

625 Nameplate: LCP identification no.Nameplate: LCP identification no.Nameplate: LCP identification no.Nameplate: LCP identification no.Nameplate: LCP identification no. No No

626 Nameplate: Database identification no.Nameplate: Database identification no.Nameplate: Database identification no.Nameplate: Database identification no.Nameplate: Database identification no. No No

627 Nameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power componentNameplate: Power component

identification no.identification no.identification no.identification no.identification no. No No

628 Nameplate: Application option typeNameplate: Application option typeNameplate: Application option typeNameplate: Application option typeNameplate: Application option type No No

629 Nameplate: Application option orNameplate: Application option orNameplate: Application option orNameplate: Application option orNameplate: Application option ordering no.dering no.dering no.dering no.dering no. No No

630 Nameplate: Communication option typeNameplate: Communication option typeNameplate: Communication option typeNameplate: Communication option typeNameplate: Communication option type No No

631 Nameplate: Communication optionNameplate: Communication optionNameplate: Communication optionNameplate: Communication optionNameplate: Communication option

ororororordering no.dering no.dering no.dering no.dering no. No No

Data

type

7

7

7

6

6

6

5

6

6

3

4

3

6

3

6

5

7

3

5

5

5

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

Conversion

index

74

74

2

0

0

0

0

0

0

-1

-3

-1

-1

-2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-2

0

0

0

0

0

Factory settings

Changes during operation:"Yes" means that the parameter can be changed,while the VLT AFD is in operation. "No" means thatthe VLT AFD must be stopped before a change canbe made.

4-Setup:"Yes" means that the parameter can be programmedindividually in each of the four setups, i.e. the sameparameter can have four different data values. "No"means that the data value will be the same in all foursetups.

Conversion index:This number refers to a conversion figure to be usedwhen writing or reading to or from a VLT AFD bymeans of serial communication.


Data type:Data type shows the type and length of the telegram.Data type Description3 Integer 16

4 Integer 325 Unsigned 86 Unsigned 167 Unsigned 32

9 Text string


VLT® 5000 AQUA


24 Volt external DC supply .................................................... 40

50/60 Hz earth loops .............................................................. 28

AAddress ................................................................................. 108

Aggressive environments ..................................................... 132

Air humidity ........................................................................... 137

Alarm word ............................................................................ 116

Alarms ................................................................................... 126

Analog inputs .......................................................................... 12

Analog outputs ....................................................................... 13

Anti windup ............................................................................. 94

Application functions .............................................................. 84

AWG ..................................................................................... 140

BBaudrate ............................................................................... 108

Broadcast ............................................................................... 97

Bus connection ...................................................................... 42

Bus feedback ....................................................................... 114

CCable lengths and cross-sections ......................................... 14

Cables .................................................................................... 26

Changing Parameter Data ..................................................... 50

Changing parameter, example .............................................. 50

Conformal Coating ................................................................. 10

Connection examples ............................................................ 44

Control and reply telegrams ................................................... 97

Control characteristics ........................................................... 14

Control keys ............................................................................ 45

Control principle ....................................................................... 7

Cooling ................................................................................... 23

Correct earthing ..................................................................... 28

DData character ....................................................................... 99

Data control byte .................................................................... 99

Data read-out ....................................................................... 112

Datalogbog ........................................................................... 119

Derating for air pressure ....................................................... 136

Derating for ambient temperature ............................. 136, 138

Derating for high switching frequency ................................. 137

Derating for installing long motor cables ............................. 137

Digital inputs ........................................................................... 12

Digital outputs ........................................................................ 13

Direction of motor rotation ..................................................... 39

Display line 2 .......................................................................... 53

Display Mode .......................................................................... 46

Display text ........................................................................... 114

EEarth fault ............................................................................. 128

Earth leakage current ........................................................... 133

Earth potential ........................................................................ 28

Efficiency .............................................................................. 138

Efficiency of the motor .................................................... 138

Efficiency of the system .................................................. 138

Efficiency of VLT 5000 Series ......................................... 138

Electrical installation

Connection examples ........................................................ 44

control cables .................................................................... 40

Direction of motor rotation ................................................. 39

Earthing of screened/armoured control cables ................ 28

Parallel coupling of motors ................................................ 39

Pre-fuses .................................................................... 37, 38

serial communication ......................................................... 28

Switches 1-4 ...................................................................... 41

External 24 Volt DC supply .................................................... 14

Externals ................................................................................. 14

Extreme running conditions ................................................. 134

Mains drop-out ................................................................. 134

Motor-generated overvoltage .......................................... 134

Short circuit ...................................................................... 134

Static overload ................................................................. 134

Switching on the output .................................................. 134

FFactory settings .................................................................... 142

Fault log ................................................................................ 120

FC protocol ............................................................................. 97

Feedback ............................................................................... 88

Feedback...

Maksimum ......................................................................... 88

Flying start ............................................................................... 84

Frequency bypass .................................................................. 69

GGalvanic isolation (PELV) ..................................................... 133

Ground leakage current ....................................................... 133

HHand/Auto linked reference .................................................. 66

Harmonics ............................................................................ 139

Heat emission ......................................................................... 27

High voltage test .................................................................... 27

IInitialization ............................................................................. 49

Initializing ............................................................................... 140

Inputs and outputs .................................................................. 73

Installation

24 Volt external DC supply ................................................ 40

Bus connection .................................................................. 42

Interference/harmonics ........................................................ 139

LLanguage ............................................................................... 51

Line supply .............................................................................. 12

Line supply 3 x 380 - 460 V .................................................. 16

Line supply 3 x 200 - 240 V .................................................. 15

Line-fuses ............................................................................... 38

Load and Motor ...................................................................... 57

Low current ............................................................................. 70

Lowpass filter time .................................................................. 96

VLT® 5000 AQUA


MMains supply interference/harmonics .................................. 139

Manual initialization ................................................................ 49

Measurements, dimensions

Manual initialisation ............................................................ 49

Mechanical installation

Please pay attention .......................................................... 23

Minimum frequency ................................................................ 50

Modules and accessories

Remote-mounting .............................................................. 23

Motor current .......................................................................... 50

Motor frequency ..................................................................... 50

Motor nominal speed .............................................................. 50

Motor power ............................................................................ 50

Motor voltage .......................................................................... 50

OOutput data ............................................................................. 12

PParallel coupling of motors ..................................................... 39

Parameter data ...................................................................... 50

PC software .............................................................................. 9

Peak voltage on motor ......................................................... 135

dV/dt ................................................................................ 135

PELV ..................................................................................... 133

Power factor ......................................................................... 139

Preset reference ..................................................................... 69

Programming .......................................................................... 51

Protection ............................................................................... 14

Protocols ................................................................................. 97

Pulse input .............................................................................. 13

Pulse reference ...................................................................... 75

Pulse scaling ........................................................................... 81

QQuick menu ............................................................................ 50

RRamp down time .................................................................... 50

Ramp up time ......................................................................... 50

RCD ...................................................................................... 133

Reference function ................................................................. 68

References & Limits ............................................................... 64

Relay 01 .................................................................................. 83

Relay 04 .................................................................................. 83

Relay 1 Function .................................................................... 50

Relay 2 Function .................................................................... 50

Relay outputs .......................................................................... 13

Reset function ........................................................................ 84

Resulting reference .............................................................. 132

Rotation .................................................................................. 39

RS 485 serial communication ................................................ 13

SSafety regulations ..................................................................... 4

Screw sizes ............................................................................. 35

Serial communication ............................................................. 97

Service functions .................................................................. 118

Setup configuration ................................................................ 51

Shielded/armored cables ....................................................... 26

Side-by-side ............................................................................ 23

Sleep mode ............................................................................ 85

Software version ....................................................................... 3

Spacing .................................................................................. 23

Status messages .................................................................. 123

Switch 1-4 .............................................................................. 41

Switching frequency ............................................................... 86

Switching on the input .......................................................... 135

TTechnical data

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 380 - 460 V ........ 18, 19

Telegram build-up .................................................................. 98

Telegram length ..................................................................... 98

Tightening-up torque .............................................................. 35

Torque characteristics ............................................................ 12

Trip locked ............................................................................ 141

UUnpacking and ordering a VLT AFD ..................................... 10

VVentilation ............................................................................... 27

WWarning

frequency ........................................................................... 71

Low current ........................................................................ 70

Warning words ...................................................................... 116

Warnings and alarms ............................................................ 126

Wrong earthing ....................................................................... 28

autorem.fr® 5000/Manual...VLT® 5000 AQUA MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark...

Documents

Transcript of autorem.fr® 5000/Manual...VLT® 5000 AQUA MG.50.I6.22 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trade mark...